JP5523720B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, includes variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable and deriving and displaying a display result. When the display result of the identification information becomes a predetermined specific display result, the game state is controlled to a specific game state advantageous to the player, and after the specific game state ends, the game state is set to a normal probability state or the specific display result. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to a high probability state that has a higher probability than the normal probability state.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “variation”) when the game medium wins in the winning area (start condition is established) is provided. Some are configured to be able to be controlled to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the result is a specific display result (big hit symbol).

  In addition, when the display result is a special display result (probability variation jackpot symbol) of the specific display result, probability variation control (probability variation control) that improves the probability of becoming a “big hit” after the end of the specific gaming state. A gaming machine that is in a high probability state (probability change state / special game state) is provided. Furthermore, after temporarily displaying non-special display results (usually big hit symbols) other than special display results as display results, the variable display of identification information is resumed, and special display results or non-special display results are finally stopped. There is also a gaming machine that executes a re-lottery effect.

  In such a gaming machine, a gaming machine has also been proposed in which the execution rate of the redrawing effect is increased in a high probability state to improve the expectation for a probable big hit in the high probability state (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 09-225101

  In the technique described in Patent Document 1, since the execution ratio of the re-drawing effect is high in the high probability state, the effect operation is monotonous and there is a possibility that the game entertainment is lowered.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the effect of the gaming machine in which probability variation control is performed and improves the interest of the game.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present invention provides:
Variable display means (for example the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol indicator each derives displays the variable display was carried out display result of the identification information of a plurality of types can be identified (for example, special symbols and decorative pattern) 8b, symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, etc. of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 9), and the display result of the identification information of the variable display means is a predetermined specific display. When a result (for example, a big hit symbol or a final stop symbol of a big hit combination) is reached, control is made to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit state) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is normally set after the specific gaming state ends. A gaming machine that is controllable to a probability state or a high probability state (for example, a probability variation state) in which the probability of the specific display result is higher than the normal probability state ,
Whether controls before Symbol particular game state, and the normal probability state display result of the identification information or control to the high probability state or controlling the is derived displayed in controlling to the specific game state Pre-determining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 56 executes the process of step S240) ,
Executed in the specific game state that is controlled based on the determination by prior articles before determining means, notification effect for notifying whether controlled to the high probability state after the specific gaming state ends (e.g., promotion effect of big hit) Notification effect executing means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 101 executes the processing of steps S704 to S715) ;
When it is determined that the high-probability state is controlled by the pre-determining unit, when the notification effect is executed by the notification effect executing unit, a first ratio is determined, and When it is determined to be controlled to the normal probability state, the notification effect determining means (for example, the processing control CPU 101 performs processing of S551A to S554) that determines the second ratio when the notification effect execution means executes the notification effect. and the execution part),
When it is not notified that the high probability state is controlled by the end of the specific gaming state, regardless of whether the high probability state or the normal probability state, a common effect (for example, mode A And a common effect execution means for executing the effect in the effect mode of mode B (for example, when the effect control CPU 101 is controlled to a predetermined special game state in which the probability change control such as the probability change state is performed and when it is not controlled. Etc., which perform a common production)
The notification effect executing means notifies that it is controlled to the high probability state on the condition that the prior determination means is determined to be controlled to the high probability state,
The notification effect determining means sets the first ratio and the second ratio during a predetermined period (for example, a period from the high base state to the low base state after the high hit state after the big hit gaming state). medium varied based the on the number of times that has been controlled to a specific game state, etc.) to determine whether to execute the notification effect (for example, effect control CPU101 corresponding to the jackpot number of continuations at step S554 (Determining whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect using the jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 164B shown in FIG. 21B, to which different judgment values are assigned )
And wherein a call.
According to this, since the execution ratio of the notification effect varies depending on the game situation during the predetermined period , even if it is determined to be controlled to the high probability state, it is controlled to the high probability state by the end of the specific gaming state. This may not be notified , and the range of production is widened and the fun of the game is improved. In addition, since the rate at which the common effects are executed varies depending on the game situation during the predetermined period, the range of effects is widened and the interest of the game is improved.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention provides:
Variable display means (for example the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol indicator each derives displays the variable display was carried out display result of the identification information of a plurality of types can be identified (for example, special symbols and decorative pattern) 8b, symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, etc. of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 9), and the display result of the identification information of the variable display means is a predetermined specific display. When a result (for example, a big hit symbol or a final stop symbol of a big hit combination) is reached, control is made to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit state) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is normally set after the specific gaming state ends. A gaming machine that is controllable to a probability state or a high probability state (for example, a probability variation state) in which the probability of the specific display result is higher than the normal probability state ,
Whether controls before Symbol particular game state, and the normal probability state display result of the identification information or control to the high probability state or controlling the is derived displayed in controlling to the specific game state Pre-determining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 56 executes the process of step S240) ,
In the specific game state that is controlled based on the determination by prior articles before determining means, notification to perform notification effect of notifying to be controlled to the high probability state after the specific gaming state ends (e.g., promotion effect of big hit) Production execution means (for example, the portion where the production control CPU 101 executes the processing of steps S704 to S715) ,
When it is determined by the pre-determining means to be controlled to the high probability state, a notification effect determining means (for example, an effect control CPU 101) that determines at a predetermined rate when the notification effect is executed by the notification effect executing means. Is a part that executes the processing of S551A to S555) ,
When the notification effect is not executed until the specific gaming state is finished, a common effect (for example, the effect mode of mode A or mode B, regardless of whether the state is the high probability state or the normal probability state) Common effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 101 is controlled in a predetermined special game state in which probability variation control such as probability variation state is performed) and when it is not controlled. Part), and
The notification effect determination unit, the specific game during said predetermined percentage for a predetermined period (e.g., from a jackpot gaming state after completion high base state, such as during the period from the high base state until a low base state) It is determined that the control is made based on the number of times controlled to the state and the fact that it is controlled to the high probability state is determined (for example, the CPU 101 for effect control has different determination values corresponding to the number of consecutive big hits in step S560). (Determining whether or not to execute probability change notification using the assigned probability change notification determination table 164C shown in FIG. 21C ))
And wherein a call.
According to this, since the ratio of notifying that it is controlled to the high probability state in the notification effect varies depending on the state of the game during the predetermined period , even if it is determined to be controlled to the high probability state, the specific game It may not be notified that the state is controlled to a high probability state by the end of the state, and the range of production is widened and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, since the rate at which the common effects are executed varies depending on the game situation during the predetermined period, the range of effects is widened and the interest of the game is improved.

In any of the above gaming machines,
When it is not notified that the high probability state is controlled by the end of the specific gaming state, the common effect execution means can execute a common effect (for example, mode A or mode B). Corresponding to the determination result that the final stop symbol is a normal jackpot combination or the promotion failure during the jackpot promotion effect in the processing of step S723 by the common effect mode control means (for example, the effect control CPU 101) controlling to the effect mode) And a part for shifting to mode A or mode B),
The common effect mode controllable by the common effect mode control means includes at least a first mode (for example, a mode A effect mode) and a second mode (for example, a mode B effect mode), and the first mode is the common mode. Although it is possible to shift from the normal mode (for example, the mode N effect mode) that is not the effect mode, the second mode may not be shifted from the normal mode.
According to such a configuration, by providing a plurality of common performance modes and providing a mode that does not shift from the normal mode, the width of the performance is widened and the interest of the game is improved.

In any one of the above gaming machines,
The variable display means establishes a start condition that allows the variable display to start after the game medium passes through the start area (for example, the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14) (for example, the CPU 56 determines in step S231). A variable display determination random number for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information in the variable display means when the game medium passes through the starting area. Random number extracting means for extracting (for example, a portion where the CPU 56 executes the process of step S219) ;
For variable display despite the previous SL start region the game medium has passed to the start condition is not satisfied, hold the variable display determination random number to the random number extracting means has extracted within a predetermined upper limit number On-hold storage means for storing as stored information (for example, the part where the CPU 56 executes the process of step S220) ,
Determining said variable display pattern using the previous SL variable display determination random number, and the determination value is assigned judgment value data (for example, variation pattern type determination table 132a-132d) to a plurality kinds of variable display pattern, the Variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 56 executes the processing of steps S270 to 272) ;
Based on the determination result of the previous SL variable display pattern determining means, variable display means for executing the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means (for example a portion presentation control CPU101 executes the process of step S162),
Before determination by prior Symbol variable display pattern determining means, wherein the starting region based on said game medium has passed, with the said variable display determination random number that is extracted the judgment value data by the random number extracting means Start determination means (for example, the CPU 56 executes the process of step S356) for determining whether or not the variable display pattern is a specific variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern that becomes super reach) among a plurality of types of variable display patterns. a part),
On the basis that is determined to be the specific variable display pattern by the previous SL start decision means, the variable display of the start condition of the variable display it is determined that the the specific variable display pattern is performed prior to establishment And a notification executing means for executing an effect for notifying that the specific variable display pattern is obtained (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 101 executes the processes of steps S506, S605, and S570B) .
Before SL determination value data, said for certain variable display pattern, regardless of the number of pending storage information in which the holding storage means for storing, turbulent as shown in a common determination value is assigned (e.g., FIG. 36 The range of numerical values MR3 “230” to “251” is commonly assigned to super reach), and for variable display patterns other than the specific variable display pattern, the reserved storage information stored in the reserved storage means is stored. Different determination values may be assigned depending on the number (for example, non-reach and normal reach assignments are different as shown in FIG. 36).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which variable display using a specific variable display pattern is not executed despite the execution of an effect on the specific variable display pattern.

In any one of the above gaming machines,
When the notification effect determining means determines that the notification effect is to be executed, the notification effect determining means selects any one of a plurality of types of notification effects at different ratios based on the number of times the specific gaming state is controlled during the predetermined period. (For example, the effect control CPU 101 assigns a determination value corresponding to the number of consecutive big hits in step S563, and uses the big hit middle promotion effect pattern determination table 164D shown in FIG. 21D). The promotion pattern during the big hit may be determined).
According to such a configuration, since the content of the effect of the notification effect varies depending on the game situation during the predetermined period, the range of the effect is widened and the interest of the game is improved.

In any one of the above gaming machines,
Based on the determination result of the prior determination means, a notice effect determination means (for example, a decision to execute a notice effect at a higher rate when controlled to the specific game state than when not controlled to the specific game state (for example, The part for which the effect control CPU 101 executes the process of step S603) and the notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect based on the determination result of the notice effect determining means (for example, the effect control CPU 101 executes the process of step S162). The notice effect determining means determines a notice effect pattern type, which is a group to which a plurality of kinds of notice effects belong, based on the determination result of the prior decision means. Pattern type determining means (for example, the part where the CPU 101 for effect control executes the processing of steps S641 to S643); A notice effect pattern determining means (for example, a notice effect pattern determining means for determining a notice effect pattern that designates a notice effect to be executed by the notice effect executing means from the notice effect patterns included in the notice effect pattern type determined by the notice effect pattern type determining means (for example, The production control CPU 101 may further include a portion for executing the processing of steps S646 to S649.
According to such a configuration, since the notice effect pattern is determined in two stages, it is easy to increase the notice effect pattern type and the notice effect pattern and to adjust the appearance rate, and to easily realize diversification of the notice effect. be able to.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows various chance eyes. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a transition of production mode. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural examples, such as a main board (game control board). It is a block diagram showing circuit configuration examples such as an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of a main board | substrate. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a variation pattern classification. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a fluctuation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a left-right output determination table. It is a figure which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows structural examples, such as a re-lottery effect execution determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the temporary stop symbol determination table before a re-lottery. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a pseudo | simulation continuous temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the stop symbol in a pseudo | simulation variation. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the notice pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural examples, such as a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows structural examples, such as an effect control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural examples, such as a design fluctuation control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an effect control pattern. FIG. 38 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a specific pattern determination process at the time of winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a specific pattern common range. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a specific pattern common range. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a timing chart showing an example of the transmission operation of the effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command process at the time of a start winning prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a re-lottery effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a promotion effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example, such as a variable display production | presentation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of a decoration symbol change completion. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect process during jackpot control. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of mode transfer setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the background image of each production mode. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation of a re-lottery effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation of a re-lottery effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of a jackpot promotion effect pattern determination table.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. A pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming machine frame (base frame) 2 and a gaming board (gauge board) 6 that is supported and fixed by the gaming machine frame 2 to form a gaming board surface. Has been. The game board 6 has a substantially circular game area 7 surrounded by guide rails. In this game area 7, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

  A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is provided on the lower surface of the gaming machine frame 2, and an excess ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3 is provided below the hitting ball supply tray 3. A hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 is provided which is operated by the player to fire the hit ball. The game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the gaming machine frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body.

  A first special symbol display 8a is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 6 (lower left of the game area 7 in the example shown in FIG. 1), and a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. A second special symbol display 8b is provided on the lower right side of the region 7. Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes) and the like. Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. There is no limitation, and for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol indicator 8a is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol indicator 8b is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  Both the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are formed in a square shape, for example. Note that the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, a number indicating “0” to “9” and a symbol indicating “−”), and the type may be different. May be different. The first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating, for example, “00” to “99”. Good.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has a decorative symbol display area for performing variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with the variable display of the first special diagram or the second special diagram. That is, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of decorative symbols. The decorative symbol display area includes, for example, a symbol display area that variably displays decorative symbols that are identification information for three decorations (for production), “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Among the symbol display areas, there are symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The positions of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R may not be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, as the display areas to be the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, three areas may be provided to be bonded or separated, or to be able to be bonded and separated. The display operation in the effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 shown in FIG. When the variable display of the first special figure is executed on the first special symbol display 8a, the production control microcomputer 100 causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display. When the special symbol display 8b is executing variable display of the second special figure, the effect display is executed by the effect display device in accordance with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. . The number of symbol display areas for variably displaying decorative symbols is not limited to three. For example, a plurality of symbol display areas such as two, four, or nine may be displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Any arrangement may be used.

  In the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, an upper effect LED 85a, a middle effect LED 85b, and a lower effect LED 85c are provided on the right side. The upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c are, for example, effects in which a related display effect is executed in each re-variation period (including the first variation period) during one variation period. ) Blinks when a predetermined production operation such as) is executed. A movable member 78 is provided on the left side. The movable member 78 is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 86, and moves when the motor 86 rotates. For example, the movable member 78 operates when a re-variation effect or the like is executed. A vibration motor (not shown) that vibrates the mounting portion of each LED is provided in the vicinity of the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c. The lighting operation of the upper production LED 85a, the middle production LED 85b, and the lower production LED 85c, and the movement operation of the movable member 78 have a possibility that the variable symbol display result of the special symbol may be a “hit”, or the decorative symbol variable display mode. It may operate when a notice effect or the like for notifying that there is a possibility of “reach” is executed.

  Below the effect display device 9, there is provided a normal winning ball device that forms a first start winning opening (first starting opening) 13. The normal winning ball apparatus is composed of, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member, and always keeps the first start winning opening 13 in a certain open state. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  Below the ordinary winning ball apparatus, an ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 15 that forms a second starting winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is provided. The normally variable winning ball apparatus 15 includes an electric tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed by a solenoid 16 into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an enlarged open state that is a tilt position. ing. As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15, when the solenoid 16 is in the OFF state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball is in a normally open state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole 14. . On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15, by the tilting control in which the movable wing piece is tilted when the solenoid 16 is in the on state, the game ball can easily enter the second start winning hole 14. Become. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening 14 even when in the normal open state, the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. May be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 15 may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port 14 by, for example, closing the second starting winning port 14 in the normally open state. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a.

  A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 13a. At this time, if the first reserved memory number as the number of effective start winning balls that entered the first start winning opening 13 is less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the first special symbol display 8 a A first start condition (also referred to as “first execution condition”) for executing a special figure game using one special figure is established. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 14a. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 13a and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 14a. May be the same number or different numbers. At this time, if the second reserved memory number as the number of effective start winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14 is less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the second special symbol display 8b A second start condition (also referred to as “second execution condition”) for executing a special figure game using two special figures is established.

  Here, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special game started earlier is being executed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, etc. When the start condition for starting the special figure game is not satisfied, the variable display is suspended. For example, when the first start condition is satisfied, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the first hold memory The number is incremented by 1 (incremented), and execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. Further, when the second start condition is satisfied, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second holding memory is stored. The number is incremented by 1 and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. When this is done, the second reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented). In this embodiment, the added value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is referred to as the total reserved memory number.

  A special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is provided below the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate that is opened and closed by a solenoid 21, and forms a large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, when the solenoid 21 is in the off state, the opening / closing plate closes the large winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, the open / close plate opens the large winning opening when the solenoid 21 is on. The game ball that has entered the special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is detected by the count switch 23. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, there is provided a first attached symbol display 9a for performing variable display of the first attached symbol which is identification information for decoration (for production) different from the decorative symbol. In the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, there is provided a second attached symbol display 9b that performs variable display of the second attached symbol that is identification information for decoration (for production) different from the decorative symbol. For example, each of the first attached symbol display 9a and the second attached symbol display 9b may be configured by two LEDs. In the first attached symbol display 9a, the variable display of the first attached symbol is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a. In the second attached symbol display 9b, the variable display of the second attached symbol is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. The display operation in the first attached symbol display 9a and the second attached symbol display 9b is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 shown in FIG.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 6 (on the right side of the game area 7 in the example shown in FIG. 1). The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). For example, the normal symbol display 10 only needs to perform variable display of the normal symbol by alternately lighting decorative lamps (or LEDs) indicating “◯” and “x”. Alternatively, the normal symbol display 10 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, etc., like the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, and the numbers indicating "0" to "9" A plurality of types of normal symbols composed of a symbol indicating “−” or the like may be variably displayed. Alternatively, the normal symbol display 10 may variably display the normal symbol by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order.

  On the side of the first attached symbol display 9a, a first special symbol reserved memory that displays the number of the first reserved memory that is updated based on the fact that a game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 is specified. A display 18a is provided. On the side of the second attached symbol display 9b, a second special symbol reserved memory that displays the second reserved memory number that is updated based on the fact that a game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 is identifiable. A display 18b is provided. For example, each of the first special symbol reserved memory number display 18a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b may be a display composed of four decorative lamps (or LEDs). The first special symbol reserved memory number display 18a increases the number of lamps (or LEDs) that are turned on by 1 each time a game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 and the first start condition is satisfied. Each time variable display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lamps (or LEDs) to be lit is decreased by one. Further, in the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, every time a game ball wins the second start winning opening 14 and the second start condition is satisfied, the number of lamps (or LEDs) to be lit is increased by one. Thus, every time variable display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lamps (or LEDs) to be lit is decreased by one.

  The display screen of the effect display device 9 is provided with a total reserved memory display unit 18c that displays the total reserved memory number, which is an added value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, in an identifiable manner. By displaying the total reserved memory number in the total reserved memory display unit 18c in an identifiable manner, it is possible to easily grasp the number of execution conditions (total number) in which the variable display start condition is not satisfied. . Note that the total reserved memory display unit 18c may not be provided as long as the first special symbol reserved memory indicator 18a and the second special symbol reserved memory indicator 18b are provided.

  On the upper part of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 is provided. For example, the normal symbol hold memory display 41 is a display composed of four decorative lamps (or LEDs), and displays the number of normal figure hold memories as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the gate 32. Here, when a game ball that has passed through the gate 32 is detected by the gate switch 32a, if the number of stored general symbols is less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the normal game by the normal symbol display 10 is used. The normal chart start condition for executing is established. If the general-game start condition for starting the general-purpose game is not satisfied due to the fact that the general-purpose game start condition is satisfied, but the general-purpose game started earlier is being executed, etc. Will occur. At this time, the number of stored common symbols is incremented by 1, and the number of lamps (or LEDs) that are lit on the normal symbol stored memory display 41 is increased by one. On the other hand, each time the normal symbol variable display by the normal symbol display 10 is started, the ordinary symbol hold memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the lamp (or LED) which is lit on the normal symbol hold memory display 41 ) Is reduced by one.

  A windmill and a number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided on the surface of the game board 6 in the game area 7. At predetermined positions in the game area 7 on the game board 6, winning holes 29, 30, 33, 39 serving as general winning holes are provided. For example, each winning port 29, 30, 33, 39 may be any one that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The game balls that have won the winning holes 29, 30, 33, and 39 are detected by the winning hole switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a provided corresponding to the respective winning holes. At this time, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 on the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part are provided outlets 26 through which the hit balls that have not been won are taken. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  At a predetermined position on the front side of the top surface of the hitting ball supply tray 3, an operation unit 38 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is installed. For example, the operation unit 38 may include a plurality of operation units such as a jog button that can be pressed and a jog dial that can be rotated. Note that the operation unit 38 is not limited to a unit that can be pressed or rotated, and may be a unit that can perform a contact operation or a pressing operation, such as a touch panel, or may be tilted like a lever-type switch. Operation may be possible. Further, instead of the operation unit 38, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. In other words, the operation unit 38 may be configured to be able to detect a predetermined operation action by the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. The player's operation action performed on the operation unit 38 is detected by the operation detection switch 38a. The operation detection switch 38a may be configured to include a plurality of detectors in order to detect a player's operation mode with respect to a plurality of operation units included in the operation unit 38 in an identifiable manner.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a ball striking device for driving a driving motor in response to the player operating the ball striking operation handle 5, and using the rotational force of the driving motor to launch the game ball to the game area 7 (see FIG. Not shown). A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7.

  When the game ball that has entered the game area 7 passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display in a general game is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when lit). For example, the lower lamp is lit when the variable display ends. For example, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per symbol”. On the other hand, if the upper lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display on the normal symbol display 10, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol becomes "general map loss". When the normal symbol variable display result on the normal symbol display 10 is “per normal symbol”, the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 is tilt-controlled for a predetermined number of times, and the second start winning opening is obtained. 14 is in an expanded open state. In other words, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 changes the second start winning opening 14 from the normal open state, which is disadvantageous to the player, to the extended open state, which is advantageous for the player, when the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per game”. Let

  When a game ball that has entered the game area 7 wins the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, it is in a state where variable display of the first special figure can be started (for example, a special symbol). The first special symbol display 8a starts variable display (variation) of the first special symbol and the first attached symbol display 9a The variable display of the first attached symbol is started, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special figure, the first attached symbol, and the decorative symbol is executed based on a winning at the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special figure cannot be started, the first special figure is used by adding 1 to the first reserved memory number on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value. The execution of the special figure game was suspended.

  If the game ball that has entered the game area 7 wins the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, the variable display of the second special figure can be started (for example, a special symbol). Variable display is completed and the second start condition is satisfied), variable display (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 8b, and at the second attached symbol display 9b The variable display of the second attached symbol is started, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special figure, the second attached symbol, and the decorative symbol is executed based on a winning at the second start winning opening 14. Unless the variable display of the second special figure can be started, the second special figure is used by adding 1 to the second reserved memory number on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value. The execution of the special figure game was suspended.

  In the total hold storage display unit 18c of the effect display device 9, the display color is changed from the left to the right in order from the variable display game such as the special figure game in which the first start condition and the second start condition are established first. A plurality of display parts are provided. As an example, when the first start condition is satisfied, one of the display parts that are normally non-displayed (transparent color) (for example, the leftmost display part among the non-displayed display parts) is displayed in blue. To change. Further, when the second start condition is satisfied, one of the display parts that are normally not displayed is changed to red display. Thereafter, when one of the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure and the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, for example, The display at the leftmost display part is removed and the display at each display part is moved leftward one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to blue display or red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part whose display color has changed) returns to non-display. Note that the total reserved memory display unit 18c is not limited to displaying the total reserved memory number so that the total reserved memory number can be specified by changing the display color, and the total reserved memory number can be specified by displaying the number of predetermined characters or displaying numbers. May be displayed.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol indicator 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b, after the special symbol variable display is started, when a predetermined time as the special symbol variable time elapses, the variable symbol variable display result The confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result, and it becomes “lost” if a special symbol other than the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round game advantageous to the player (also simply referred to as “round”) is executed a predetermined number of times. . Further, after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit game state different from the big hit game state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, the numbers indicating “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” are big hit symbols, the numbers indicating “2” are small hit symbols, A symbol indicating “−” is a lost symbol. Each symbol such as a big win symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol indicator 8a is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol indicator 8b. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol.

  In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” are 15 rounds. The jackpot symbol is a special symbol indicating the number “5” and the two-round jackpot symbol. In the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) as the first specific gaming state controlled after the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the opening / closing plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is played by opening the large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. A round is performed that changes to a first state that is advantageous to the user. In this way, the opening / closing plate that opened the grand prize opening during the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 6 and then closed the grand prize opening, thereby playing the special variable prize winning ball device 20 as a game. One round is completed by changing to a closed state, which is a second state that is disadvantageous to the user. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round, which is the open cycle of the big prize opening, is the first number (for example, “15”). A game in the 15 round big hit state in which the number of round executions is “15” is also referred to as a 15-time open game.

  In the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state) as the second specific gaming state controlled after the two round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is played in each round. The period for changing to the first state that is advantageous to the player (the period in which the big prize opening is opened by the opening / closing plate) is a second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the first period in the 15 round big hit state. . In the 2 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round is a second number (for example, “2”) which is smaller than the first number in the 15 round big hit state. In addition, in the two round big hit state, at least one of the period in which the big winning opening is opened in each round is the second period and the number of executions of the round is the second number is performed. Control other than that may be performed, and other control may be performed in the same manner as in the 15 round big hit state. A game in the round two big hit state in which the number of round executions is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game. In the two-round big hit state, the predetermined winning ball apparatus provided separately from the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 in each round is changed from the second state that is disadvantageous to the player to the first state that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to return to the second state after a predetermined period (first period or second period) has elapsed.

  Out of the special symbols showing the numbers “3” and “7” that will be the 15 round big hit symbols, the 15 round big hit based on the special symbol showing the numbers “3” being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbols in the special game After the state is over, one of the special gaming states is a time-short state (“low probability”) in which the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened compared to the normal state (also referred to as “low probability low base state”). Also referred to as “high base state”. Here, the normal state is a game state other than a special game state such as a big hit game state or a special game state such as a short-time state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed) Thus, the same control as in the state in which the initialization process is executed after power-on is performed. If the time-short state is terminated when any of the conditions of the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit” is satisfied first, Good. In addition, after the 15 round big hit state based on the fact that the special symbol indicating the number “3” out of the 15 round big hit symbols is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, it does not become the short-time state. You may make it be in a normal state. Like the special symbol indicating the number “3”, the 15 round jackpot symbol controlled to the short-time state or the normal state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is , 15R non-probable large hit symbol (also referred to as 15R non-probable variation special figure).

  Out of the special symbols showing the numbers “3” and “7” that will be the 15-round jackpot symbol, the 15-round jackpot is based on the special symbol showing the number “7” being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special game. After the state is over, as one of the special gaming states different from the short-time state, for example, the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability variation control (probability variation control) continues. ) Is performed as a highly probable gaming state (also referred to as “highly accurate high base state”). In high-probability gaming states such as the probability variation state, the variable display result of each special figure game or decorative symbol variable display is a “big hit” and the probability of being further controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher than in the normal state. To be improved. In this embodiment, such a high-probability gaming state is continued until the next variable display result is “big hit”, regardless of the number of executions of the special figure game. On the other hand, after entering the high-probability gaming state, one of the conditions is that a special-number game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or the variable display result is “big hit”. You may make it complete | finish, when it establishes previously. In addition, even if a specific number of special figure games are executed in the high probability game state or before the variable display result is “big hit”, the high probability game state is generated at a predetermined rate when the special figure game is started. May be terminated. Alternatively, when the special display game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) without the variable display result being “big hit” after the probability changing state, the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to the normal state. While returning to the same variable display time, the probability variation control may be continuously performed. Like the special symbol indicating the number “7”, the 15 round jackpot symbol controlled to the high probability gaming state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is It is called a 15R probability variation big hit symbol (also called a 15R probability variation special figure).

  After the two round jackpot state based on the fact that the special symbol indicating the number “5”, which becomes the two round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the control is made to the probability change state. In addition, as a special gaming state, for example, while the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is the same as the normal state, the probability variation control (probability variation control) is continuously performed (“high probability low base”). (Also referred to as “state”). Like the special symbol indicating the number “5”, the two round jackpot symbol controlled to the high probability gaming state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is It is called 2R probability variation big hit symbol (also called 2R probability variation special figure).

  After the special symbol indicating the number “2” as the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit game state is controlled. In this small hit gaming state, a variable winning operation for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 to the first state advantageous to the player is performed as in the two round big hit state. That is, in the small hit game state, for example, the operation of opening the large winning opening for the second period by the opening / closing plate provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is repeatedly executed until the second number of times is reached. In the small hit gaming state, similarly to the two round big hit state, the period in which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second period, and the number of executions of the operation in which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second number. It may be controlled so that at least one of them is performed. After the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed, and the game state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” is continuously controlled. However, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state has reached a predetermined number when the special figure game with the variable display result of “small hit” is executed, after the end of the small hit gaming state, The special gaming state may end and return to the normal state. A game in the small hit gaming state in which the number of times that the big winning opening is opened by the variable winning operation is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game, similar to the game in the two round big hit state. When the winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 20 in each round in the two round big hit state is changed to the first state, the same as the two round big hit state in the small hit gaming state. In the aspect, the winning ball apparatus may be changed to the first state.

  In the probabilistic state and the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 10 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball device 15 based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal” The second start condition is such that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening 14, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state and a control to increase the number of tilts compared to the normal state. The control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of the establishment of. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. As described above, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 14 in the probability changing state or the short time state is advantageous to the player, and is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening 14 is in the expanded open state is increased as compared to when the high opening control is not performed. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to either the certain change state or the short-time state. .

  The variable display of the attached symbols by the first attached symbol display 9a and the second attached symbol display 9b is realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit every predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Anything is acceptable. Here, the variable display of the first attached symbol by the first attached symbol display 9a is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a. Further, the variable display of the second attached symbol by the second attached symbol display unit 9b is synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 8b. Synchronous means that the start time and end time of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. When the big special symbol or the small bonus symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the LED on the side reminding that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small bonus” on the first attached symbol display 9a. Remains lit. When the big special symbol or small bonus symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the LED on the side reminding that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small bonus” on the second attached symbol display 9b. Remains lit.

  As an example of the display result that reminds the user that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” in the attached symbol, it is sufficient if the upper LED is lit. On the other hand, as a display result of the attached symbol that reminds that the variable display result is “losing”, it is sufficient that the lower LED is lit. In the attached symbol, the display result that reminds that the variable display result is “big hit” may be different from the display result that reminds that the variable display result is “small hit”. . As an example, recall that the variable display result is “big hit” when the upper LED is lit, while the variable display result is “small hit” when both the upper and lower LEDs are lit. You may be reminded of something. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the function of the 1st attached symbol display 9a and the 2nd attached symbol display 9b with the effect display apparatus 9. FIG. That is, the first attached symbol and the second attached symbol may be controlled to be variably displayed as images on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  One of the special figure games using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a and the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b is started. Corresponding to the change of the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle” and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R provided in the effect display device 9 (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction). ) Is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 9, A finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese numerals). “One” to “Eight”, English letters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. It may be a decorative image showing a person, an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure. In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, a blank symbol (a symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  While the decorative symbols are changing, in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, the symbol numbers sequentially flow from the top to the bottom from the smallest to the largest. When such a scroll display is performed and the decorative symbol having the maximum symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the minimum symbol number (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R (for example, the “left” symbol display area 9L), the symbol number is scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol number. When the smallest decorative symbol is displayed, the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number may be displayed. The direction in which the scroll display is performed is not limited to the direction from the upper side to the lower side, for example, from the right side to the left side, from the left side to the right side, or from the lower side to the upper side. There may be.

  In the period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R The variable display state of symbols may be a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state means a decorative symbol (“reach variation symbol” which is not yet stopped when the decorative symbol stopped on the display screen of the effect display device 9 forms a part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, a part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R (for example, “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R) is predetermined. The remaining symbol display area (for example, “medium” symbol display area 9C) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating “7” alphanumeric characters) constituting the jackpot combination is stopped. In the display state in which the decorative symbols are fluctuating, or the decorative symbols are all or part of the jackpot combination in all or part of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. It is the display state which is fluctuating synchronously while configuring the part.

  Further, in response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative symbol is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative symbol is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Or by changing the display mode of the background image or changing the variation mode of the decorative pattern, a presentation operation different from that before reaching the reach state may be executed. Such an effect operation such as a display of the character image, a change in the display mode of the background image, and a change in the decorative pattern change mode is referred to as a reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation on the display screen of the effect display device 9, but also the sound output operation by the speaker 27, the lighting operation (flashing operation) of the frame LED 28, and the like are the operation modes before reaching the reach state. May be included in different modes of operation. As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability”).

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike the reach production, the decorative display variable display state may become the reach state and the variable display result may be a “hit”. There may be a case where a variable display effect for notifying the player is given by a variable display mode of the symbol or the like. In this embodiment, a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect can be executed, and whether or not each effect operation is executed in response to the change pattern being determined on the main board 31 side or the like. It is determined. The variable display effect in this embodiment is not particularly limited as long as the special figure change time changes depending on whether or not the corresponding effect operation is executed. For example, when the variable display effect is executed, it is only necessary that the variable symbol display time (special symbol change time) of the special symbol becomes longer than when the variable display effect is not executed.

  In the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, the symbol display of “left”, “middle”, and “right” is displayed based on the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special game is established once. After the decorative symbols are changed in all of the areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and then all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are displayed. It is possible to perform effect display for performing variable display again by changing the decorative design again (pseudo-variable) at a predetermined time (for example, up to three times). As an example, in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R have pseudo-repetition chance GC1 as shown in FIG. Any one of a plurality of predetermined combinations of non-specific display results such as GC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, the “left symbol” shown in FIG. 2A and the like is a decorative symbol displayed (stop display or temporary stop display) in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the “middle symbol” is “medium”. It is a decorative symbol displayed in the symbol display area 9C, and the “right symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, it is stopped and displayed to the player by, for example, performing fluctuation display and changing the decorative symbol immediately after stopping for a short time. It is only necessary that the player can recognize that the decorative pattern is not fixed. Alternatively, in the temporary stop display, the decorative design may be re-fluctuated after the decorative design is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the decorative design that has been stopped is confirmed.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the variable display result may be set so that the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases as the number of pseudo-continuous changes (re-changes) increases. Accordingly, the player can recognize that the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is performed by temporarily stopping display of any one of the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8, and the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations increases. Accordingly, the expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” is enhanced. In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) once to three times. Based on this, it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative symbols has been started 2 to 4 times in succession. The number of executions of the variable display (including the initial fluctuation) by executing the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) once or a plurality of times in the “simulated continuous” variable display effect is also referred to as the total number of fluctuations of the pseudo continuous.

  When the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, a re-change effect such as a related display effect may be executed along with a plurality of change displays including the initial change. As an example, during the period of each variation display (including the first variation) by the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, the ones that are lit among the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c increase one by one. It may be controlled so that the three LEDs blink after all the three LEDs are turned on. It should be noted that all LEDs (upper effect LED 85a, middle effect LED 85b, and lower effect LED 85c) may be in an extinguished state during a period (temporary stop period) in which any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is displayed. Further, during the period of re-variation (including the initial variation), the LED may be controlled so that the display color changes, or it is not controlled so that the number of lighted items increases one by one. You may make it control so that what is lit among effect LED85a, medium effect LED85b, and lower effect LED85c changes. As another example, the movable member 78 may be controlled to operate during the period of each variation display (including the initial variation) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. As yet another example, the effect display device 9 may be controlled to display a specific character image during each variation display (including the first variation) by the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. In addition to some or all of these re-variation effects, or in place of some or all of these re-change effects, one of LED lighting or blinking, operation of the movable member 78, and display of the character image. It may be controlled to execute a re-variation effect combining a part or all. Rather than the case where the re-variation effect is executed with only one type of effect mode, when the re-change effect that combines a plurality of types of effect modes is included, or when the re-change effect is performed multiple times May change, the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” and the possibility that the big hit type will be “15R probability change” may be increased.

  The production operation executed as the re-variation production may include any production operation such as sound output from the speaker 27 and lighting operation of other light emitters such as the decoration LED 25 and the frame LED 28. Further, for example, a difference in output of sound or sound effect from the speaker 27, a difference in motion of the effect target (for example, the movable member 78) (difference in operating speed, difference in operating distance, difference in operating direction, etc.), effect display device The effect of the re-variation effect is made different depending on the difference in the motion of the character image displayed on the screen 9 (the difference in the operation speed, the difference in the operating distance, the difference in the operation direction, etc.). The effect mode in the re-variation effect may be made different by changing the character display or changing the display of the background image. Further, in addition to the re-variation effect executed during the variation of the decorative symbol, for example, when the decorative symbol serving as one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped, for example, audio output from the speaker 27, the decorative LED 25, The player may be able to recognize that the chance eye has been temporarily stopped and displayed by an arbitrary presentation operation such as a lighting operation of another light emitter such as the frame LED 28.

  As a variable display effect different from the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, a “slip” variable display effect may be executed. In the variable display effect of “sliding”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and then two or more symbol display areas (for example, Decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R, or the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R). After that, a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of symbol display areas (for example, “left” symbol display area 9L and “right” symbol display area 9R) of the symbol display areas temporarily displayed. (1) or (2), after changing the decorative design again, the stop display is performed, and the effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed.

  Unlike variable reach effects such as reach effects or “pseudo-ream” or “slip” during decorative display of decorative symbols, for example, displaying effect images such as predetermined character images and message images. Notifying the player that the decorative display variable display state may reach a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit” due to a presentation operation different from the variable display operation of the symbol. A notice effect may be executed. The effect operation that becomes the notice effect is the variable display state of the decorative symbol after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R. Anything that is executed (started) before reaching the reach state may be used. In addition, the notice effect that notifies that the variable display result may be a “big hit” may include one that is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of notice effects such as “character display”, “step-up operation”, and “jog operation notice” are set to be executable. An effect operation that becomes a notice effect may be any action that does not cause a change in the variable symbol display time (special figure change time) depending on whether or not it is executed.

  In the “character display” notice effect, during the variable display of the decorative design, for example, an effect display for displaying a character image prepared in advance at a predetermined position on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed.

  In the notice effect of “step-up operation”, during the variable display of the decorative design, for example, by the effect display that switches and displays a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance in a predetermined order on the display screen of the effect display device 9. An effect operation may be performed in which the effect mode changes (steps up) in a plurality of stages. In the notice effect of “step-up operation”, after any one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, the effect image The effect display in the notice effect may be terminated without switching. Further, in the notice effect of “step-up operation”, during the variable display of the decorative design, for example, the effect mode is changed in a plurality of stages by the effect operation in which the movable member 78 is operated in a plurality of types of operation modes in a predetermined order (step Up) may be performed. In the notice effect of “step-up operation”, after the movable member 78 performs the effect operation in one kind of operation mode, the effect operation in the notice effect is terminated without switching to the effect operation of the second stage. There may be.

  As described above, the notice effect of the “step-up operation” is executed in response to one start prize (that one game ball has entered the first start prize port 13 or the second start prize port 14). This is a kind of notice effect that is executed during variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. In particular, the step-up notice effect in which the aspect of the notice (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) changes (steps up) in multiple stages. It is. In general, as the number of times of change (number of steps) increases, the reliability (possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit”) increases. Further, depending on the number of steps in the step-up notice effect or the effect mode at each step, it becomes “15R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, a specific reach effect is executed, “15R non-probable variation” Of the promotion from “big hit” to “15R probable big hit”, at least one of them may be notified in advance. Further, the object to be notified may be changed according to the number of times of change (number of steps). For example, “reach determination” may be performed when going to the second step, “super reach confirmation” when going to the third step, and “big hit confirmation” going to the fourth step. As the change of the notice mode (step-up), different character images may be displayed in order, or the step-up may be performed by changing the shape or color of one character. May be. That is, it is only necessary to be able to recognize that the state of the notice means (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) as viewed from the player changes stepwise.

  In the notice effect of “jog operation notice”, for example, the display of the effect image on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed in response to the operation unit 38 being operated by the player during the variable display of the decorative symbols. Or, by changing the sound output from the speaker 27, the production operation is changed. As an example, in the notice effect of “jog operation notice”, a predetermined effect operation as an operation promotion effect is performed during variable display of decorative symbols. The operation promotion effect is obtained by, for example, displaying an effect image such as a character image or a message image prepared in advance at a predetermined position on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Any production operation that prompts the operation may be used.

  The effect operation that prompts the player to operate the operation unit 38 is not limited to an effect image displayed on the effect display device 9, but a sound that outputs a predetermined sound from the speaker 27, a decoration LED 25 and a frame LED 28 are There are things that are turned on or blinking in a lighting pattern, those that turn on or blink a light-emitting body such as an LED built in the operation unit 38, and effects that are provided inside or outside the game area 7 such as a movable member 78. The movable member provided may be operated in a predetermined operation mode, or a part or all of these may be combined. When such an operation promotion effect is performed, an operation effective period for effectively detecting the operation of the operation unit 38 by the player is set. Then, when the operation detection switch 38a detects that the operation of the operation unit 38 by the player is the operation mode presented in the operation promotion effect within the operation effective period, the operation promotion effect is generated at the timing when the operation is detected. For example, causing the effect display device 9 to display any effect image of a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance, or any one of a plurality of types of sound patterns prepared in advance. Various effect operations such as outputting sound effects corresponding to the pattern from the speaker 27 are executed.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state will not reach the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There are cases in which a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as “non-reach” (also referred to as “unreach loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a confirmed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol indicating the number “3”, which is a 15R non-probable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be determined in the special symbol game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the decorative symbol variable display state Corresponding to having reached the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, for example, the symbol pattern that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9 is the fixed ornament symbol that is normally a big hit combination. ”To“ 8 ”, any one of the decorative symbols having the even numbers“ 2 ”,“ 4 ”,“ 6 ”,“ 8 ”is“ left ”,“ middle ”,“ right ” The symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”). Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a 15R non-probable big hit symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the fixed symbol of the normal big hit combination is stopped and displayed. The mode is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a jackpot type) of “15R uncertain change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result of “15R uncertain change” becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the 15 round big hit gaming state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the short time state. Become.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the 15R probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the decorative symbol variable display state is displayed. In response to reaching the reach state, a reach effect similar to the case where the jackpot type is “normal” is executed, or a reach effect different from the case where the jackpot type is “normal” is executed. After that, a definite decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination has, for example, a symbol number that is variably displayed in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 9. ”To“ 8 ”, any one of the decorative symbols having the odd numbers“ 1 ”,“ 3 ”,“ 5 ”,“ 7 ”is“ left ”,“ middle ”,“ right ” The symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol becoming a 15R probability variable big hit symbol in the special figure game, after the reach effect is executed, the variable symbol display mode of the decorative symbol in which the fixed decorative symbol of the probability variable big hit combination is stopped and displayed is: This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a big hit type) of “15R probability change” when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  When the 15R probability variable jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the decorative symbol. In this way, even when the fixed decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, if the probability variable big winning symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special game, it is included in the variable display mode of “15R probability change”. . Thus, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the variable display mode of “15R probability change”, it is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state ends, it is controlled to the probability changed state.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed during variable display of a decorative symbol in which the confirmed decorative symbol is a normal jackpot combination or a probable variation jackpot combination. In the re-lottery effect, after the decorative symbols that are usually the big hit combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” on the effect display device 9, For example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the same decorative symbols are made to change again, and the decorative symbol (probable variable symbol) that becomes a probable big hit combination, One of the decorative symbols (ordinary symbols) that is a normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed (final stop display) as a confirmed decorative symbol. Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “15R uncertain change”, as the re-lottery effect, the fixed ornament that becomes the normal big hit combination after re-changing the decorative pattern displayed temporarily stopped A change promotion promotion effect that derives and displays a symbol is performed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “15R probability change”, as the re-lottery effect, after the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped is re-variable, the probability change big hit combination is confirmed. The changing promotion success effect that stops displaying decorative symbols may be executed, or the changing promotion failure effect may be executed.

  Whether or not to control to a high-probability gaming state such as a probable change state during the period until the end of the 15-round big win state after the definite decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is derived and displayed (whether or not it is a promising big hit In some cases, a promotion effect during a big hit (also referred to simply as a promotion effect) is executed. Here, the timing at which the jackpot promotion effect is executed may be a period before the first round in the 15 round jackpot state is started after the variable display result (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed. In the 15 round big hit state, it may be a period during which any round is being executed, or in a 15 round big hit state, it may be a period from the end of any round to the start of the next round. It may be a period from the end of the last round in the 15 round big hit state to the start of the next variable display game. Alternatively, an effect operation corresponding to the promotion effect during the big hit may be performed during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or decorative design after the end of the 15th round big hit state. The jackpot promotion effect executed after the final round in the 15 round jackpot state is sometimes referred to as “ending promotion effect” in particular.

  The jackpot promotion effect includes a jackpot promotion promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion that the gaming state becomes a high probability gaming state even though the confirmed decorative symbol is a normal jackpot combination, and a promotion that becomes a high probability gaming state There is a promotion promotion failure during the jackpot to notify that there is no. For example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 and either the normal symbol or the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result, or the decorative symbol is variably displayed. May be notified so that the player can recognize the presence or absence of promotion to be in a high probability gaming state by displaying different effect images. When a jackpot promotion effect is executed in a 15-round jackpot state or the like based on the jackpot type of “15R uncertain change”, a jackpot promotion promotion failure effect is performed. On the other hand, when the jackpot promotion effect is executed in the 15 round jackpot state based on the jackpot type of “15R probability change”, the jackpot promotion promotion effect may be performed. In this embodiment, a plurality of jackpot promotion effects patterns are prepared, and when the jackpot promotion effect is executed, the jackpot promotion effect pattern is determined and corresponds to the determined jackpot promotion effect pattern Promotion promotion during the big hit.

  When the special symbol indicating “1” or “5”, which becomes a big hit symbol for two rounds, is stopped and displayed as a final special symbol in the special game, or a special symbol indicating “2”, which is a small hit symbol. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state. For example, a plurality of types predetermined as the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 as shown in FIG. One of the combinations of confirmed decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. In response to the special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a special symbol indicating the number “5”, which is the 2R probability variation big hit symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is variable display. This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a big hit type) of “2R probability change” (also referred to as “sudden probability change big hit” or “surprise accuracy”) when the result is “big hit”.

  In addition, when a special symbol that becomes a two-round big hit symbol or a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state, After a predetermined reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. In addition, when a special symbol that becomes a two-round big hit symbol or a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state, and the chance to open twice You may make it the fixed decoration symbol used as the predetermined non-reach combination different from eyes TC1-TC4 stop-displaying.

  Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “2R probability change”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state, and when the two round big hit state ends, it is controlled to the probability changed state. After the variable display result becomes “small hit”, the game state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” continues after the variable winning operation is performed under the control of the small hit gaming state. However, if it is determined that the special game state is to be ended corresponding to the special game whose variable display result is “small hit”, the normal state is controlled after the small hit game state is ended. .

  When the variable display result is either “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R probability change”, or when the variable display result is “small hit”, the pre-opening effect is performed twice during variable display of the decorative pattern There are things to do. In the effect before opening twice, a predetermined effect operation is performed in response to being controlled to a two-round big hit state or a small hit game state. In addition, the pre-opening effect is not limited to an effect operation executed during variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, but can be varied in part or all of the period of two rounds of big hit state or small hit game state. An effect operation that is continuously performed from the display may be included. When the pre-opening effect is started, the decorative symbol that is variably displayed may be erased, and after the pre-opening effect is executed, the confirmed decorative symbol may not be derived and displayed.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment includes a plurality of effect modes having different effect modes in the effect display device 9 and the like. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a transition example of the effect mode. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, four effect modes, mode A, mode B, mode C, and mode N, are provided. These effect modes are switched according to the current effect mode, the jackpot type, or the like when the big hit gaming state is ended, when the decorative symbol variable display is started, or when the short-time state is ended. In addition, in order to enhance a production effect, production modes other than these may be provided.

  Mode N is also referred to as a normal mode. When no transition is made to any production mode, that is, the production mode such as after power-on is this mode N. As shown in FIG. 3, in this mode N, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R probability variation”, and the decorative symbol of the direct probability variation big hit combination is derived and displayed, the probability variation is caused by the re-lottery effect. When the jackpot combination is derived and displayed (in the case of direct hit), or when it is informed that the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed by the jackpot promotion promotion effect, the jackpot gaming state After completion, the mode shifts to the mode C effect mode. Also, in mode N, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R probability variation” and the decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is derived and displayed by the re-lottery effect (15R probability variation (latency)) Or, when it is not notified that the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed due to the jackpot promotion effect, or the variable display result is “big hit” and the jackpot type is “15R non-probable”. In this case, after the big hit gaming state, the mode A is changed to the mode A production mode. In mode N, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R probability change”, the mode shifts to the mode C effect mode after the big hit gaming state.

  In mode A, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R probability variation”, and the decorative symbol of the direct probability variation big hit combination is derived and displayed, or when the probability variation big hit combination is derived and displayed by the re-lottery effect (In the case of 15R probability change (direct hit)), or when it is informed that the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed due to the jackpot promotion effect, the mode C is set after the jackpot gaming state is finished. Transition to the production mode. Also, in mode A, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R probability variation”, and the decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is derived and displayed by the redrawing effect (in the case of 15R probability variation (latency)) Or, when it is not notified that the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed due to the jackpot promotion effect, or the variable display result is “big hit” and the jackpot type is “15R non-probable”. In this case, after the big hit gaming state, the mode B is shifted to the effect mode. In mode N, if the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R probability change”, the mode A effect mode continues even after the big hit gaming state ends. Further, in mode A, when the time saving state is completed, the mode shifts to the mode N effect mode.

  In mode B, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R probability variation”, and the decorative symbol of the direct probability variation big hit combination is derived and displayed, or when the probability variation big hit combination is derived and displayed by the re-lottery effect (In the case of 15R probability change (direct hit)) or when the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed by the jackpot promotion effect, it is informed that the transition to the probability change state is made, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, the mode C Transition to production mode. Also, in Mode B, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R probability variation” and the decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is derived and displayed by the re-lottery effect (in the case of 15R probability variation (latency)) Or, when it is not notified that the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed due to the jackpot promotion effect, or the variable display result is “big hit” and the jackpot type is “15R non-probable”. In such a case, the mode B effect mode continues even after the big hit gaming state ends. In mode B, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R probability change”, the mode B effect mode is continued even after the big hit gaming state ends. Further, in the mode B, when the time saving state is completed, the mode is shifted to the mode N effect mode.

  In mode C, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R probability variation”, and the decorative symbol of the direct probability variation big hit combination is derived and displayed, or the probability variation big hit combination is derived and displayed by the re-drawing effect. (In the case of 15R probability change (direct hit)) or when it is informed that the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed due to the jackpot promotion effect, the mode C is maintained even after the jackpot gaming state ends. The production mode continues. Also, in Mode C, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R probability variation” and the decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is derived and displayed by the re-lottery effect (in the case of 15R probability variation (latency)) Or, when it is not notified that the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed due to the jackpot promotion effect, or the variable display result is “big hit” and the jackpot type is “15R non-probable”. In this case, after the big hit gaming state, the mode B is shifted to the effect mode. Further, in mode N, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R probability change”, the mode C effect mode continues even after the big hit gaming state ends.

  Here, the gaming state when the mode N is the production mode is the normal state. The mode C production mode is a case where it is notified that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R-probable change” and the state is shifted to the probable change state, or the variable display result is “big hit” and the big win When the type is “2R probability change”, since the transition is made from another effect mode, it is possible to specify that the gaming state is the probability change state. In the effect mode of mode C, “probability change state” or the like may be displayed on the effect display device 9 to clearly indicate the probability change state.

  On the other hand, in the mode A and the mode B, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R probability variation” and it is not notified that the transition to the probability variation state has been made. When the big hit type is “15R uncertain change” and the big hit type is changed to another production mode. The gaming state at this time is controlled to a probability variation state when the jackpot type is “15R probability variation”, and is controlled to a time reduction state when the jackpot type is “15R non-probability variation”. That is, in the effect modes of mode A and mode B, the gaming state can be either the short time state or the probability variation state. In the production mode of mode A and mode B, for example, a common effect is executed when controlled to a predetermined special game state where probability variation control such as probability variation state is performed and when not controlled, It becomes impossible to specify whether or not the game is controlled in the special game state. Note that the plurality of performance modes may include a performance mode in which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be recognized, such as mode N or mode C, for example, mode A or mode B. As in the effect mode, only the effect mode whose game state cannot be specified may be included. An effect mode in which the game state cannot be specified, such as the effect modes of mode A and mode B, is also referred to as a common effect mode.

  As described above, the mode B effect mode is not directly shifted from the mode N effect mode. By doing so, the range of production is widened and the interest of the game is improved.

  The effect mode of the above-described mode C is an effect mode (for example, battle mode) in which an effect with the same background or character image is continuously executed over a plurality of variable displays, for example. More specifically, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the teammate character performs a battle effect that fights the enemy character, and the big hit type is “15R probability variation”, and the decorative pattern of the probability variation big hit combination is When it is derived and displayed, the teammate character performs an effect of winning the enemy character and continues the battle mode. When the big hit type is “15R probability variation” (latency) or “15R non-probability variation” and the decoration pattern of the normal jackpot combination is derived and displayed, the teammate character performs an effect of losing to the enemy character. Then, the battle mode may be terminated, and the mode A or mode B may be shifted to the production mode. Thus, in mode C, it can be notified that a certain change state is caused by a battle effect. In such a battle mode, the decorative display variable display mode may be “reach” only when the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Furthermore, the ratio that the jackpot type is “15R probability change” may be different depending on which combination of the decorative symbols is used when the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach”. In the effect modes of mode A, mode B, and mode C, for example, different effect modes are set by changing the background displayed on the effect display device 9. Moreover, it is good also as different production modes by making the character in the above-mentioned battle mode different, or making it produce a different aspect. In addition, when the game state is in the probable state in the common effect mode in the common effect mode, such as the mode A and the mode B effect mode, the end of the time-short state is ended. When the variable display of 100 times as a condition is executed, it may be notified that the state is a probable change state. (If the gaming state is a short-time state, the short-time state ends and the gaming state can be specified) ) Further, during the jackpot gaming state when the effect mode is shifted to after the jackpot gaming state ends, the rendering corresponding to the transitioned rendering mode may be executed. For example, during the jackpot gaming state, an effect of displaying a character image or background corresponding to each effect mode (mode A, mode B, and mode C) may be executed.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes various control boards such as a main board (game control board) 31, an effect control board 80, an audio output board 70, a lamp driver board 35, and a payout control board 37 as shown in FIG. Has been. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 77 that relays various control signals transmitted between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80. In addition, various boards such as a power supply board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board may be disposed on the back surface of the game board 6 or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 31 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 31 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch arranged at a predetermined position, an effect control board 80, and the like. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 31 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b to perform the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 10 by controlling on / off / coloring of the normal symbol display 10. It also has a function to control. The main board 31 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 560, an input driver circuit 58 that takes in detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 560, and the game control microcomputer 560. An output circuit 59 for transmitting the solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 16 and 21 is mounted.

  The effect control board 80 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 31, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 31 via the relay board 77, and produces the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, and the decoration. Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical components for rendering including the LED 25 and the frame LED 28 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 80 includes all or part of the display operation in the effect display device 9, all or part of the sound output operation from the speaker 27, and all or part of the on / off operation in the light emitter such as the decoration LED 25 and the frame LED 28. The function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component for production to execute a predetermined production operation is provided.

  The sound output board 70 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 80, and is used to output sound from the speaker 27 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 80. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp driver board 35 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 80, and a light emitter such as a decoration LED 25 and a frame LED 28 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 80. A lamp driver circuit that performs on / off driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the main board 31 receives detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a and 39a. The transmission wiring is connected. The gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are game media such as what are called sensors, for example. As long as it has an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a gaming ball as In addition to the wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the normal symbol display 10, and the like, the main board 31 includes the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10. The special symbol hold memory display 18a, the second special symbol hold memory display 18b, the normal symbol hold memory display 41, and the like are connected to wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control. In addition, the main board 31 is equipped with an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer. May be.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 31 toward the effect control board 80 is relayed by the relay board 77. The main board 31 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to the relay board 77, for example, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 560, for example, as shown in FIG. The included output port 571 is connected. The output buffer circuit included in the output port 571 can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77, and the signal input from the relay board 77 to the main board 31 is possible. To prevent. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 80 or the relay board 77 side to the main board 31 side.

  For example, a transmission direction regulating circuit 74 as shown in FIG. 5 may be provided on the relay board 77 for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit 74 includes a diode having an anode connected to a main board connector corresponding to the main board 31 and a cathode connected to an effect control board connector corresponding to the effect control board 80, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit 74 can block the input of a signal from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77 and allow the signal to pass only in the direction from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. . Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 80 side to the main board 21 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit 74 is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 77, and an output buffer is provided between the game control microcomputer 560 and the main board side connector on the main board 31. By providing the output port 571 including a circuit, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 31 from the outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electrical signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling the display operation of the effect image on the effect display device 9, a sound control command used for controlling sound output from the speaker 27, a decoration LED 25, and a frame. A lamp control command used to control the lighting operation of a light emitter such as the LED 28 is included. FIG. 6A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 6A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 6A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a. The command 8002H is a second change start command for designating the start of change in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 8b. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  In this embodiment, the first and second change start commands and the change pattern designation command are prepared as separate effect control commands. On the other hand, the designation content indicating which of the first special figure and the second special figure is to be changed and the designated content of the fluctuation pattern are configured to be specified by one effect control command. Also good. As an example, an effect control command in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a special symbol (first special figure or second special figure) that starts change and a change pattern is prepared. You may enable it to specify the special symbol and fluctuation pattern which become a fluctuation start. Here, when the special symbol and the variation pattern that start the variation can be specified by one effect control command, the special symbol (the first special feature that starts the variation) for one variation pattern. There are cases where it is necessary to prepare two types of effect control commands according to the figure or the second special figure). On the other hand, if an effect control command for designating a special symbol for starting variation and an effect control command for designating a variation pattern are prepared separately, two types of effect control commands corresponding to the special symbol for starting variation are prepared. And the number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types of variation patterns may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 6B, the variable display result is determined in advance as to whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, and the variable display result is Different EXT corresponding to the big hit type determination result of whether the decorative display variable display mode (big hit type) of “big hit” is “15R uncertain change”, “15R positive change”, or “2R positive change” Data is set. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R uncertain change”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R probability change”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R probability change”. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result notification command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result indicated in the variable display result notification command may be configured to be specified by one effect control command. As an example, an effect in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a variation pattern and a variable display result (any one of “losing”, “big hit”, “small hit”, and a big hit type in the case of “big hit”). A control command may be prepared, and information that can specify the variation pattern and the variable display result may be transmitted by the effect control command. Alternatively, the variation pattern and the variable display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands. Here, when the variation pattern and the variable display result are configured to be specified by a single effect control command, a plurality of types of effects corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display results for one variation pattern. You may need to provide control commands. On the other hand, if the production control command for designating the variation pattern and the production control command for notifying the variable display result are prepared separately, the number of production control commands corresponding to the number of types of the variation pattern and the variable display result are provided. The number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The command 8F00H is a decorative symbol stop command for designating stop of variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to whether the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the time-short state. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the normal state, and the command 9501H is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the probability change state, The command 9502H may be a third gaming state designation command corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the short time state.

  In this embodiment, a decoration symbol stop command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 as an effect control command for designating stop of variable display of the decoration symbol. On the other hand, the decorative symbol stop command may not be transmitted. In this case, on the side of the production control board 80, the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command is specified and the first variation start command and the second variation start command are received. When the elapsed time reaches the specified special figure variation time, a setting for ending the effect executed in response to the special game is performed without receiving an effect control command from the main board 31. You can make it.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. In the hit start designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determined result. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the corresponding relationship in the variable display result notification command.

  The command A1XXH is a big winning opening releasing notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is a period in the big winning gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. With the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening or the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, the number of executions of rounds (for example, “1” to “15”) in the 15 round big hit state, or the big winning in the 2 round big hit state or the variable winning operation Different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of times the mouth is opened (for example, “1” or “2”). In the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, regardless of whether the big winning opening is in the open state or the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state, Alternatively, a continuous performance operation may be executed from the start time of the small hit game state or from the start time of variable display of the decorative symbols to the end time of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Or, in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, depending on whether the big winning opening is in the open state or the period in which the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state, different performance operations are performed. May be executed.

  The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the winning end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command or the winning start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command or the hit start designation command. . In addition, when controlled to the two round big hit state and / or small hit game state, some or all of the hit start designation command, the big prize opening opening designation command, the big prize opening opening designation command, and the winning end designation command are all or part of Instead of being transmitted, an effect operation may be executed during the two round big hit state and / or during the small hit game state according to the fluctuation pattern indicated in the fluctuation pattern designation command.

  The command B1XXH is based on the fact that the game ball that has entered (started winning) the first starting winning opening 13 formed by the normal winning ball apparatus is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a, and the first special symbol display 8a This is a first start opening prize designation command for notifying that a first start condition for executing a special figure game using one special figure has been established. In this embodiment, the first start opening winning designation command notifies the determination result using the predetermined determination numerical value at the time of the first start winning that is the time of detecting the game ball that has passed through the first start winning opening. Also used as a control command. For example, as shown in FIG. 6 (C), in the first start opening prize designation command, a predetermined determination numerical value (for example, numerical data indicating a random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type) is a reserved memory number of the special figure game ( Regardless of the number of special figure reservations), the decorative pattern variation pattern is a specific variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern with super reach). EXT data is set. More specifically, command B100H notifies that it is outside the specific pattern common range, while command B101H notifies that it is within the specific pattern common range.

  The command B2XXH is based on the fact that the game ball that has entered (started winning) the second starting winning opening 14 formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. Is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure is established. In this embodiment, the second start opening winning designation command notifies the determination result using the predetermined determination numerical value at the time of the second start winning that is at the time of detecting the game ball that has passed the second start winning opening. Also used as a control command. For example, as shown in FIG. 6C, in the second start opening winning designation command, a predetermined determination numerical value (for example, numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the variation pattern type) is a reserved memory number of the special figure game. Depending on whether the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a specific variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern with super reach) regardless of (special figure holding memory number) is within the specific pattern common range or out of range Different EXT data is set. More specifically, command B200H notifies that it is outside the specific pattern common range, while command B201H notifies that it is within the specific pattern common range.

  The command C0XXH displays the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in the start winning memory display area 5H provided in the display area of the effect display device 9 and the like. This is a pending storage count notification command for notifying the total pending storage count that is the total value of. In response to the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, for example, either the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted as the reserved storage number notification command. Following this, it is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In the reserved memory count notification command, for example, the total number of stored data (for example, “1” to “8”) of the hold data in the first special figure hold storage section 151A and the second special figure hold storage section 151B shown in FIG. Alternatively, different EXT data is set corresponding to the total number of start data stored in the start data storage unit 151C (for example, “1” to “8”). Thereby, on the side of the production control board 80, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 31 is received, and the first special drawing is received. The total number of stored hold data in the hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B can be specified.

  The command D0XXH is a winning variable display result notification command for notifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. In the winning variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 6D, the winning determination result indicating whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small win”, or variable Corresponding to the big hit type determination result of whether the variable display mode (big hit type) of the decorative symbol when the display result is “big hit” is “15R non-probable change”, “15R positive change”, or “2R positive change” Different EXT data is set. More specifically, the command D000H is a winning first variable display result notification command indicating a winning determination determination result indicating that the variable display result is “losing”. The command D001H is a winning second variable display result notification command indicating the winning determination result and the big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R uncertain change”. The command D002H is a winning third variable display result notification command indicating the winning determination result and the big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R probability change”. The command D003H is a winning fourth variable display result notification command indicating a winning determination result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R probability change”. The command D004H is a winning fifth variable display result notification command indicating a winning determination determination result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer. For example, as shown in FIG. 3, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores a game control program, fixed data, and the like. 54, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 55 that provides a work area for game control, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 56 that performs control operations according to a program, an I / O (Input / Output port) 57, and a CPU 56 Is configured to include a random number circuit 503 that independently updates numerical data indicating a random number value. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 560, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 56 executing a program read from the ROM 54. At this time, the CPU 56 reads the fixed data from the ROM 54, the CPU 56 writes the various data to the RAM 55 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 56 stores the various data temporarily stored in the RAM 55. The CPU 56 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 560 via the I / O 57, and the CPU 56 goes outside the game control microcomputer 560 via the I / O 57. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed. The one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 560 only needs to include the RAM 55 in addition to the CPU 56, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Further, the I / O 57 may be externally attached.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  On the main board 31, for example, a random number circuit 503 included in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 4 counts numerical data indicating various random numbers used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main board 31 side. As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, on the main board 31 side, a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a big hit type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern type, Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern and the random number value MR5 for determining the normal display result are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used.

  Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers. The random number circuit 503 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 56 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 503 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated by the random number circuit 503 independently of the CPU 56, and the numerical data indicating the other random number values MR2 to MR5 is updated by the CPU 56 as a random counter. It may be updated by software using Also, by executing predetermined processing such as scramble processing and arithmetic processing using all or part of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503, numerical data indicating all or part of the random number values MR1 to MR5 is obtained. It may be updated. The random number circuit 503 may be built in the game control microcomputer 560, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 560.

  The game control microcomputer 560 may have a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 56 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the setting is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random numbers generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in the special figure game as “big hit”. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”. The random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is any one of “15R non-probability”, “15R positive change”, “2R positive change”, which is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit”. Random number values used for determining the value, for example, take values in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random value MR3 is in the range of “1” to “251”. Takes the value of The random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used for determining the variation pattern of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random value MR4 is a value in the range of “1” to “997”. Take. The random value MR5 for determining the general-purpose display result is used for determining whether the variable display result in the general-purpose game by the normal symbol display 20 is “per-normal” or “unusual for general-purpose”. For example, a value in the range of “3” to “13”. That is, the random number value MR5 for determining the normal game display result is a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter through the second start winning port 14 formed by the normal variable winning ball device 15 based on the variable display result in the normal game (normally open). The state is used to determine whether or not to change from a state) to a state in which a game ball can easily enter (expanded open state).

  FIG. 8 shows a decorative pattern variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. Among the cases where the display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “15R non-probable change” or “15R positive change” and “2R positive change”, the variable display result is “small hit”. Corresponding to cases, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”) and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” is referred to as a hit variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 8, in this embodiment, variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4 are prepared in advance as non-reach variation patterns. Further, as the reach variation pattern, variation pattern PA2-1, variation pattern PA2-2, variation pattern PB2-1, variation pattern PB2-2, variation pattern PA3-1, variation pattern PA3-2, variation pattern PB3-1, variation A pattern PB3-2 is prepared in advance. The hit fluctuation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R non-probable change” or “15R positive change” are the change pattern PA4-1, change pattern PA4-2, change pattern PB4-1. The fluctuation pattern PB4-2, the fluctuation pattern PA5-1, the fluctuation pattern PA5-2, the fluctuation pattern PB5-1, and the fluctuation pattern PB5-2 are prepared in advance. As variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R probability variation”, or the variable display result is “small hit”, the variation pattern PC1-1 to variation pattern PC1- 3 is prepared in advance. Further, a fluctuation pattern PC1-4 and a fluctuation pattern PC1-5 are prepared in advance as hit fluctuation patterns corresponding only when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R probability change”.

  FIG. 9 shows the variation pattern types of decorative symbols in this embodiment. Each variation pattern shown in FIG. 8 is included in at least one variation pattern type among the plurality of variation pattern types shown in FIG. In other words, each variation pattern type only needs to be configured to include one or a plurality of variation patterns classified (grouped) based on, for example, an effect operation performed during variable display of decorative symbols. As an example, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which a variable display state of a decorative design does not become a reach state by classifying (grouping) a plurality of variation patterns according to the type of reach effect (effect mode), and a variation with normal reach What is necessary is just to divide into the fluctuation pattern classification in which the pattern is included, and the fluctuation pattern classification in which the fluctuation pattern with a super reach (super reach α or super reach β) is included. As another example, categorizing (grouping) multiple variation patterns according to the presence or absence of “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects and the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) to execute “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects A variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that is not included, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is 1 in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, and “pseudo-continuous” What is necessary is just to divide into the variation pattern classification in which the variation pattern which makes the frequency | count of execution of a pseudo | simulation continuous variation (revariation) 2 or more is included in the variable display effect of this. As yet another example, a plurality of variation patterns may be classified (grouped) according to the presence or absence of variable display effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip”, or the variable display time of decorative symbols. Among the plurality of variation pattern types, there may be one configured to include a common variation pattern.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 9, the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3 are prepared in advance in response to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. Yes. Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and “variable” variable display mode, variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4 are prepared in advance. Corresponding to the variable display result (big hit type) of “15R uncertain change” or “15R probability change” when the variable display result is “big hit”, the fluctuation pattern type CA3-1 to the fluctuation pattern type CA3-3 are prepared in advance. Yes. Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the variable display mode (big hit type) of “2R probability change” and the variable display result is “small hit”, the variation pattern type CA4-1 is prepared in advance. Has been. Furthermore, the variation pattern type CA4-2 is prepared in advance only in the case where the variable display result is the “big hit” and the variable display mode (big hit type) of “2R probability change”.

  The variation pattern type CA1-1 is a variation pattern type of “no shortening” in which the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is not shortened and variable display effects such as “pseudo-ream” and “slip” are not executed. , A variation pattern previously associated with “no shortening” is included. The variation pattern type CA1-2 is, for example, a variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol in response to the total reserved memory number being “3” or more, or the time shortening control being performed in the probability variation state or the short time state. It is a variation pattern type of “with shortening” in which the time is shortened and variable display effects such as “pseudo-ream” and “slip” are not executed, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “with shortening”. The variation pattern type CA1-3 is a variation pattern type of “sliding, pseudo-continuous” in which a variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” or “sliding” is executed when the variable display mode is “non-reach”. It includes a variation pattern previously associated with “slip, pseudo-ream”.

  The variation pattern type CA2-1 is when the reach effect is ended with the normal reach that becomes the normal reach effect after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state without executing the variable display effect of the “pseudo-ream”. Is a variation pattern type of “no normal reach (losing) quasi-continuous” for deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol of the reach combination, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “no normal reach (losing) quasi-continuous”. In the variation pattern type CA2-2, the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is two times. This is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (losing) quasi-continuous variation twice” for deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol of reach combination when the production is finished, and is associated with “normal reach (losing) quasi-continuous variation twice” in advance. Variation patterns are included.

  In the variation pattern type CA2-3, the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is one, and the normal display is performed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state. This is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (losing) quasi-continuous variation once” that derives and displays a determined decorative symbol of reach combination when the production is finished, and is associated with “normal reach (losing) quasi-continuous variation once” in advance. Variation patterns are included. Fluctuation pattern types CA2-4 are accompanied by super reach (super reach α or super reach β) after the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state, and when the reach production ends, the definite decorative symbols of the reach combination are derived and displayed. The variation pattern type of “Super Reach (Lose)” is included, and includes a variation pattern associated with “Super Reach (Lose)” in advance.

  In the variation pattern type CA3-1, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is not executed, but the normal display is performed after the variable symbol display state of the decorative pattern is set to the reach state, and when the reach effect ends, the definite decoration of the jackpot combination is determined. It is a variation pattern type of “no normal reach (big hit) quasi-continuous” for deriving and displaying a symbol, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “no normal reach (big hit) quasi-continuous”. In the variation pattern type CA3-2, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, and then the normal reach is involved. Is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (big hit) pseudo-relation” and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “normal reach (big hit) pseudo-ream”. Fluctuation pattern type CA3-3 is a “super reach (big hit)” that displays a definite decorative symbol of a big hit combination when super reach is included after the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, and the reach effect is finished. It is a variation pattern type, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “super reach (big hit)”.

  The variation pattern type CA4-1 is a variation pattern type of “2nd release chance stop” that derives and displays a definite decorative symbol that is one of the 2nd release chances TC1 to TC4. Are included in advance. In the example of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 8, the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 are variation patterns in which the confirmed decorative design is one of the two chances of opening TC1 to TC4, and the variation pattern type CA4. −1. In the variation pattern type CA4-2, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R probability variation”, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, and then the fixed decorative symbol of the reach combination is derived and displayed. The variation pattern type of “reach at the time of two-time release (2R probability variation)” includes a variation pattern previously associated with “reach at the time of two-time release (2R probability variation)”. In the example of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 8, the variation pattern PC1-4 and the variation pattern PC1-5 are variation patterns in which the determined decorative symbol is a reach combination, and are included in the variation pattern type CA4-2. .

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 54 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 4 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 54 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 56 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 54 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 56 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 31, and a variation pattern for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns of decorative symbols. Table data constituting the table is stored.

  FIG. 10 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 130 stored in the ROM 56. The special symbol display result determination table 130 is determined to be a variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol indicator 8a or the special symbol game by the first special symbol indicator 8b. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not the variable display result is controlled to the big hit gaming state with "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state with "small hit" FIG. 11 is a table referred to for determination based on a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result.

  In the special figure display result determination table 130, a numerical value (to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short-time state, or a probabilistic state. (Determined value) is assigned to one of the special chart display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. In this embodiment, whether the game is a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a or a special game using the second special graphic by the first special symbol display 8b. Regardless, the special figure display result is determined with reference to the same special figure display result determination table 130.

  On the other hand, determination values are assigned to the special graphic display results corresponding to the special graphic game by the first special graphic display 8a and the special graphic game by the first special graphic display 8b. Different decision tables may be prepared. In this case, in the case of the special figure game by the first special symbol display 8a and the case of the special figure game by the first special symbol display 8b, the determined value is assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. May be different. As an example, in the case of a special figure game by the first special symbol display 8b, the ratio determined as the special figure display result of “small hit” compared to the case of the special figure game by the first special symbol display 8a. As a result, a determination value may be assigned to each special figure display result.

  With such a setting, in the special figure game using the second special figure, the probability that the variable display result will be “small hit” is reduced compared to the special figure game using the first special figure. When the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening 14 due to the high opening control in a short time state, the special figure display result is “small hit” and the little hit game state in which almost no prize ball is obtained. It is possible to prevent the game entertainment from being reduced due to a delay in the game in the probability variation state or the short time state. In particular, when the special symbol game on the first special symbol display unit 8b is executed in preference to the special symbol game on the first special symbol display unit 8a, the first special symbol display unit 8b is in a probable change state or a short time state. Since the frequency of the special game in the game will be increased, the time from the probability change state or short-time state (particularly the probability change state) to the 15th round big hit state will be shortened by such setting, and the game entertainment will be reduced. The effect that can be suppressed is great. Further, in the case of a special figure game by the first special symbol display 8b, a determined value may be assigned so that the special figure display result of “small hit” is not determined.

  FIG. 11 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 56. The jackpot type determination table 131 is variably displayed based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big jackpot” and control is made to the jackpot game state. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “15R uncertain variation”, “15R certain variation”, and “2R certain variation”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, whether the value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 14 is “1” or “2”. Accordingly, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is assigned to the big hit type such as “15R uncertain change”, “15R probability change”, “2R probability change”, and the like. Here, the variable special symbol designation buffer value becomes “1” when the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a is executed, and the second special symbol indicator 8b makes the second value. It becomes “2” when the special figure game using the special figure is executed.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131, the table data indicating the determination values assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types is the result of determining whether to control to the 15 round jackpot state or the 2 round jackpot state, and the end of the jackpot gaming state Later, it becomes data for determination corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to control to the probability variation state. For example, the table data indicating the decision value assigned to the big hit type of “15R non-probable change” or “15R probable change” corresponds to the decision result of controlling to the big round state of 15 rounds, while the big hit of “2R probable change” The table data indicating the decision value assigned to the type corresponds to the decision result that the control is performed in the two round big hit state. Further, the table data indicating the decision value assigned to the “15R non-probable” jackpot type corresponds to the decision result that the control is not controlled to the probability change state, while the “15R probability change” or “2R probability change” jackpot type. The table data indicating the determined value assigned to indicates the determination result that the control is performed in the probability variation state. The jackpot type determination table 131 is a value corresponding to the determined jackpot type (for example, any one of “0” to “2”) as a value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer 155 (a jackpot type buffer value). Table data (setting data) may be included.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 11, the allocation of the determined value to each jackpot type differs depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”. For example, for the big hit type of “15R probability change”, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a decision value in the range of “37” to “72” is assigned, while the fluctuation special figure designation buffer When the value is “2”, a determined value in the range of “37” to “100” is assigned. For the big hit type of “2R probability variation”, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a decision value in the range of “73” to “100” is assigned, while the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is In the case of “2”, no decision value is assigned.

  In the setting example shown in FIG. 11, the special figure display result is “big hit” based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the first special symbol display 8b is satisfied. If it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state, it will not be decided to control to the two round big hit state with the big hit type as “2R probability variation”. With such a setting, when the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening 14 by the high opening control in the probability variation state or the short time state, the big hit type is “2R probability variation” and almost no prize ball is obtained. It is possible to prevent the game from being controlled to the two round round big hit state, and to suppress the decline of the game interest due to the delay in the game in the probability variation state or the short time state. In particular, when the special symbol game on the first special symbol display unit 8b is executed in preference to the special symbol game on the first special symbol display unit 8a, the first special symbol display unit 8b is in a probable change state or a short time state. Since the frequency at which the special game is executed is increased, such a setting has a great effect of suppressing the decline of the game entertainment. In addition to this setting, the special symbol game on the first special symbol display device 8b is executed in preference to the special symbol game on the first special symbol display device 8a. The ratio of hitting big hits can be increased to improve the gaming fun.

  Even when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, for example, a smaller decision value than that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1” is obtained for the special figure display result of “2R probability variation”. It may be assigned. In addition, when the gaming state is the short-time state, if the big hit type is “2R probability change” and the state shifts to the probability change state after the end of the two round big hit state, the degree of advantage for the player increases. Therefore, when the gaming state is the short-time state, even if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the big hit type determination table is assigned so that the determination value is assigned to the special figure display result of “2R probability change”. The table data in 131 may be configured.

  FIG. 12 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 56. In this embodiment, as the variation pattern type determination table, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 12 (A), the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 12 (B), and FIG. The loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C shown in FIG. 12 and the loss change pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D shown in FIG.

  The jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern type is changed according to the determination result of the jackpot type. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the numerical value MR3. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, a comparison with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is made according to whether the determination result of the jackpot type is “15R uncertain variation”, “15R probability variation”, or “2R probability variation”. The numerical value (determined value) is assigned to one of the variation pattern type CA3-1 to the variation pattern type CA3-3, the variation pattern type CA4-1, and the variation pattern type CA4-2. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, the determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern type differs depending on which of the plurality of types of jackpot types is determined. There is a part. For example, depending on whether the big hit type is “15R uncertain change” or “15R probability change”, the allocation of the decision values to the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-3 is different. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same variation pattern type can be varied according to the determination result as to which of the multiple types of jackpot types.

  Further, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, there is a portion in which the determined values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of jackpot types is determined. For example, when the big hit type is “15R uncertain change” or “15R probability change”, the decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-1 to the variation pattern type CA3-3, while the variation pattern type No decision value is assigned to CA4-1 and variation pattern type CA4-2. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “2R probability change”, the decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 and the variation pattern type CA4-2, while the variation pattern type CA3-1. No determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-3. Thus, when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is controlled to the 2 round big hit state according to “2R probability change”, the variation pattern type is different from the case of being controlled to the 15 round big hit state. Can be determined.

  When the jackpot type is determined to be “15R non-probability change”, “15R probability change”, or “2R probability change”, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of a normal state, a probability change state, and a short-time state. Depending on the above, the assignment of the decision value to each variation pattern type may be made different. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same fluctuation | variation pattern classification can be varied according to which of a plurality of types of gaming states. Further, when the big hit type is determined to be “15R non-probability change”, “15R probability change”, or “2R probability change”, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of the normal state, the probability change state, and the short-time state. Accordingly, the determined values may be assigned to different variation pattern types. Thereby, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states.

  The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B is a table that is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern type when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “small hit”. In the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, all numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1. Here, a part of the determined value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 in accordance with the case where the jackpot type is “2R probability variation” in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. Yes. As described above, the variation pattern type CA4-1 is a common variation pattern type for the case where the big hit type is “2R probability change” and the case where the special figure display result is “small hit”. That is, the table data corresponding to the big hit type “2R probability change” in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A and the table data constituting the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B include a common variation pattern type. Is set to

  When the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D are determined (predetermined) as the special figure display result to be “lost”, the variation pattern type is determined. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. Here, the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C is used when the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is not shortened, for example, when the gaming state is normal and the total number of reserved memories is less than “3”. Selected as the table used. On the other hand, the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D is special when, for example, the game state is a probability change state or a short time state, or when the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more even in the normal state. It is selected as a use table when the variable display time of symbols and decorative symbols is shortened.

  Note that the variation pattern type is determined by referring to different determination tables when the gaming state is a probability change state or a short-time state and when the gaming state is a normal state and the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more. You may be made to be. Further, the variation pattern type may be determined by referring to a different determination table depending on whether or not the total reserved storage number is a predetermined number other than “3” or not. Alternatively, instead of the total number of reserved memories, the variation pattern type is determined by referring to a different determination table depending on whether the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are equal to or greater than a predetermined number. You may do it. In this case, when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, “3” or the like), the variation pattern type includes a variation pattern that has a shorter variable display time than when it is less than the predetermined number. It suffices that the determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined to be higher. Alternatively, even when the gaming state is a probabilistic state or a short time state, it is determined whether or not the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “1” or the like), and different determination tables are set according to the determination result. The change pattern type may be determined with reference to the reference. For example, if the total number of stored storages is less than a predetermined number in the probability variation state or the time reduction state, the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C is selected as the use table, while the probability variation state or the time reduction state exists. Sometimes, if the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D may be selected as the use table.

  In the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is the variation pattern type CA1-. 1 to a variation pattern type CA1-3 and a variation pattern type CA2-1 to a variation pattern type CA2-4. In the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, a determination value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern type is different. There is a part. For example, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, assignment of determination values to the variation pattern type CA1-3 and the variation pattern type CA2-1 is different. . Thereby, the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied depending on whether or not the variable display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is shortened.

  Further, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, there are portions where determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types. For example, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C, determination values are not assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2 and the variation pattern type CA2-3, while the variation pattern type CA1-1 and the variation pattern A decision value is assigned to the type CA2-2. On the other hand, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, no determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-1 or the variation pattern type CA2-2, while the variation pattern type CA1-2. Further, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA2-3. Thereby, depending on whether or not the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types.

  In this embodiment, when the special figure display result is “losing” and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the range of “230” to “251”, the gaming state and the total number of reserved memories Regardless, the variation pattern type CA2-4 including a variation pattern with super reach (super reach α or super reach β) is determined. That is, when the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted from the random number circuit 503 or the like is any one of “230” to “251”, at least super reach is involved regardless of the gaming state and the total number of reserved memories. The variable display of the decorative design is executed.

  When the special figure display result is determined to be “losing”, the determined value for each variation pattern type depends on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probable variation state, or a short-time state. The assignment may be different. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same fluctuation | variation pattern classification can be varied according to which of a plurality of types of gaming states. In addition, when the special figure display result is determined to be “losing”, the determined value is set to a different variation pattern type depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability variation state, or a short-time state. It may be assigned. Thereby, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states.

  In this embodiment, by referring to the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, the variation pattern type CA1-1 to the variation pattern type CA1-3 and the variation The pattern type can be determined as any one of the pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4. Here, as shown in FIG. 7, the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3 are variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. It is. The variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4 are variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”. Therefore, based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, by referring to the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, It is possible to determine whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state.

  The determination values assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-1 and the variation pattern type CA1-3 in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D are the variation patterns in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C. It is larger than the determined value assigned to the type CA1-1 and the variation pattern type CA1-2. With such a setting, when the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is shortened, it is determined that the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is not set to the reach state at a higher rate than when the variable symbol is not shortened. If the average variable display time in the non-reach fluctuation pattern is set to be shorter than the average variable display time in the reach fluctuation pattern, the total reserved storage number is a predetermined number (specifically, “ 3 ") or more, the average variable display time can be shortened compared to when it is less than the predetermined number, and when it is in the probabilistic state or the short time state, the total number of stored storages in the normal state As compared with the case where is less than a predetermined number (specifically, “3”), the average variable display time can be shortened.

  FIG. 13 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 56. In this embodiment, a loss variation pattern determination table 133A shown in FIG. 13A and a hit variation pattern determination table 133B shown in FIG. 13B are prepared in advance as variation pattern determination tables.

  The loss variation pattern determination table 133A is based on the random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern according to the determination result of the variation pattern type, etc. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. In the loss variation pattern determination table 133A, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type is one corresponding to the case where the special figure display result is “lost”. Or, it is assigned to a plurality of variation patterns (loss variation patterns).

  In the loss variation pattern determination table 133A, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern PA1-3 corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is CA1-3. As shown in FIG. 6, the variation pattern PA1-3 is a variation pattern that executes a “slip” variable display effect when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. With such a setting, even when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable pattern effect such as “slip” is executed by being determined by the variation pattern PA1-3. Can do. In the loss variation pattern determination table 133A, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern PA1-4 corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is CA1-3. As shown in FIG. 6, when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 has pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect. ) Is executed once. With such a setting, even when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed by being determined as the variation pattern PA1-4. Can do.

  Note that the ratio determined for the variation pattern for executing the variable display effect may be different depending on whether the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is shortened. As an example, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D shown in FIG. 12 (D), a smaller determination value than the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal) 132C shown in FIG. It may be assigned to the pattern types CA1-3. In the example of setting the variation pattern shown in FIG. 6, the special pattern variation time (variable display time of the special symbol) in the variation pattern PA1-1 in which the variable display effects such as “pseudo ream” and “slip” are not executed is 12000 milliseconds [ ms], the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 is set to 3000 milliseconds [ms]. On the other hand, the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 for executing the variable display effect of “pseudo” is 16000 milliseconds [ms] in the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 for executing the variable display effect of “slip”. The special figure fluctuation time at is set to 24000 [ms]. That is, when the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the special pattern change time in the change pattern PA1-3 for executing the “slip” variable display effect, or the change pattern for executing the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. The special figure fluctuation time in PA1-4 is longer than the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern in which these variable display effects are not executed.

  For example, when the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “3”) or more, there is a variation pattern for executing variable display effects such as “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous” compared to a case where the total number is less than the predetermined number. A determination value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined to the included variation pattern types CA1-3 is low. As a result, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average variable display time can be shortened compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. Further, for example, in the case of the probability change state or the short time state, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type CA1-3 is larger than that in the normal state when the total number of reserved memories is less than a predetermined number (for example, “3”). A determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so as to be lower. As a result, the average variable display time can be shortened when the probability change state or the time reduction state is set, compared to when the total number of reserved storage is less than the predetermined number in the normal state.

  When the hit variation pattern determination table 133B is determined (pre-determined) as the special figure display result to be “big hit” or “small hit”, the fluctuation pattern determination random number is determined according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the numerical value MR4. In the winning variation pattern determination table 133B, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type indicates that the special figure display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Are assigned to one or a plurality of variation patterns (per variation pattern).

  The RAM 55 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 4 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  For example, a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 14 is provided in the RAM 55 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 14 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a start data storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control. A timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A is a special figure game in which a game ball wins a first start winning opening 13 formed by the normal winning ball apparatus and the first start condition is satisfied but the first start condition is not satisfied. The hold data of (the special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates with a reservation number in the order of winning (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening 13, and the first start condition by the winning (game ball detection) The numerical data indicating various random values extracted from the random number circuit 503 or the like by the CPU 56 based on the establishment of the above is set as the pending data, and stored until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). In this embodiment, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, Is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A as the hold data.

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B is characterized in that the game ball is won at the second start winning opening 14 formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 and the second start condition is satisfied but the second start condition is not satisfied. The holding data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure by the first special symbol display 8b) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening 14 and the second starting condition by the winning (game ball detection). The numerical data indicating various random numbers extracted from the random number circuit 503 or the like by the CPU 56 based on the establishment of the above is set as the pending data and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). In this embodiment, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, Is stored in the second special figure holding storage unit 151B as holding data.

  The start data storage unit 151C stores start data indicating which of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 a game ball has won, so that the winning order of each game ball can be specified. As an example, the start data storage unit 151 </ b> C has “first” start data indicating a winning at the first start winning opening 13 or “second” start data indicating a winning at the second starting winning opening 14. The game balls are stored in association with the hold numbers according to the winning order of each game ball.

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a special figure process flag, a common figure process flag, a big hit flag, a small hit flag, a probability change flag, a short time flag, and the like.

  The special figure process flag indicates the progress of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a, the progress of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b, and the like. In step S15 of FIG. 31 executed for control or in the special symbol process shown in FIG. 32, it is instructed which process should be selected and executed. The normal symbol process flag is used to select / execute processing in step S16 of FIG. 31 or the normal symbol process shown in FIG. 43 in order to control the progress of the normal symbol game using the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 10. Tell what to do.

  The big hit flag is set to the on state in response to the determination (predetermined) that the variable display result is “big hit” when the special game is started. On the other hand, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off in response to the big hit symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game. The small hit flag is set to the on state in response to the determination (predetermined) that the variable display result is “small hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off in response to the small hit symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game.

  The probability change flag is set to an on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to a high probability gaming state such as a probability changing state, while the high probability gaming state ends. Cleared and turned off. The time reduction flag is set to an on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko machine 1 being controlled to a time reduction state or a probability change state, while being cleared in response to the completion of the time reduction state or the probability change state. Is turned off. In this way, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be specified from the state of the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag. That is, if both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off, the gaming state is a normal state. If the probability variation flag is off and the time reduction flag is on, the gaming state is a time reduction state. If both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are on, the gaming state is a probability change state.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, the time for controlling the progress of the big hit gaming state on the main board 31 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to a time measured to control the progress of the big hit gaming state, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the game control process timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time, such as a start time of a big hit gaming state, and counts up periodically.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 31 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as the variable display time (special figure variation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game. . As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured in order to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The normal variation timer is used for measuring the time for controlling the progress of the general diagram game, such as the variable symbol display time (ordinary variation time) of the normal symbol, on the main board 31 side. . As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 includes a random counter, a first start winning determination counter, a second start winning determination counter, a first reserved memory number counter, a second reserved memory number counter, and a total reserved memory number counter. , A short time counter, a round counter, etc. are provided.

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 is a numerical value extracted from the random number circuit 503 separately from the random number circuit 503 or a part of numerical data indicating a random value used for controlling the progress of the game. This is for the CPU 56 to use the data and count so as to be updatable by software. For example, numerical data indicating random values MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, MR4, and MR5 are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 56 The numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 56 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 503, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 503. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on the numerical data.

  The first start winning determination counter counts the number of times that it has been determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal that is the detection signal of the game ball transmitted from the first start port switch 13a is on. belongs to. For example, each time it is determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal from the first start port switch 13a is on, the stored value in the first start winning determination counter is incremented by one. Then, when the stored value in the first start winning determination counter reaches a predetermined winning determination value, it is determined that the game ball that has entered the first start winning opening 13 is normally detected. In addition, the stored value in the first start winning determination counter is cleared when it is determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal is OFF or when it is determined that the winning determination value has been reached. It may be initialized to “0”.

  The second start winning determination counter counts the number of times that it has been determined that the signal state in the second start winning signal that is the detection signal of the game ball transmitted from the second start port switch 14a is on. belongs to. For example, each time it is determined that the signal state in the second start winning signal from the second start port switch 14a is ON, the stored value in the second start winning determination counter is incremented by one. Then, when the stored value in the second start winning determination counter reaches a predetermined winning determination value, it is determined that the game ball that has entered the second start winning opening 14 has been normally detected. In addition, the stored value in the second start winning determination counter is cleared when the signal state in the second start winning signal is determined to be off, or when it is determined that the winning determination value has been reached. It may be initialized to “0”.

  The first reserved memory number counter is for counting the first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A. For example, in the first reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the first reserved memory number is stored as the first reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The second reserved memory number counter is for counting the second reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B. For example, in the second reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the second reserved memory number is stored as the second reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The total reserved memory number counter is for counting the total reserved memory number obtained by adding up the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. For example, count value data corresponding to the total reserved memory number is stored in the total reserved memory number counter as a total reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction) in accordance with the increase or decrease in the total reserved memory number )

  The time reduction counter is used to count the number of remaining special-purpose games that can be executed until the time reduction control is ended when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the time reduction state. As an example, when the jackpot gaming state ends, data indicating the count initial value “100” corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value being “0” is set as the hourly count count value in the hourly number counter. . Thereafter, until the variable display result becomes “big hit”, the time count count value is subtracted by 1 every time the special game is finished. When the time reduction count value reaches “0”, the time reduction flag is cleared and turned off, for example, thereby controlling the end of the time reduction state and shifting to the normal state.

  The round number counter is for counting the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating a count initial value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. When one round is completed and the next round is started, the round count value is incremented by 1 and updated.

  Game control buffer setting unit 155 Various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are provided. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a start port buffer, a variation special figure designation buffer, a big hit type buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 31 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer includes a plurality of buffer areas (for example, “12”), and setting data indicating storage addresses in the ROM 54 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area where setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and a plurality of buffer areas may be used as a ring buffer.

  The starting port buffer stores a buffer value indicating which of the first starting winning port 13 and the second starting winning port has been detected. As an example, “1” is set to the start port buffer value in response to the normal detection of a game ball that has entered the first start winning port 13. Further, “2” is set to the start port buffer value in response to the normal detection of the game ball that has entered the second start winning port 14.

  The variable special symbol designation buffer includes a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 8b. A buffer value indicating whether the special figure game is executed is stored. As an example, “1” is set in the variable special figure designation buffer value in response to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a. Further, “2” is set in the variable special figure designation buffer value in response to the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b. Then, in response to the end of the special figure game, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “0”.

  The big hit type buffer stores a buffer value corresponding to a determination result in which the big hit type is one of a plurality of types when the variable display result is “big hit”. As an example, based on the settings in the big hit type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. ”Is set to“ 1 ”for the jackpot type buffer value, and“ 2 ”is set to the jackpot type buffer value if the jackpot type is“ 2R probability variation ”.

  The I / O 57 included in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 4 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 560. And an output port for transmission.

  For example, an effect control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 5 is mounted on the effect control board 80 shown in FIG. The production control microcomputer 100 receives the production control command for instructing production contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77, and the first attached symbol display 9a and the second attached display variably display the attached symbols. Display control in the symbol display 9b, display control in the effect display device 9 that variably displays decorative symbols, and the like are performed. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 performs lighting control of the decoration LED 25 provided on the gaming board 6 and lighting control of the frame LED 28 provided on the gaming machine frame 2 via the lamp driver board 35. In addition, the sound output control in the speaker 27 is performed via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 5, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The production control microcomputer 100 may be configured to include a production control CPU 101, a RAM that stores information related to the production, and the like. The RAM may be externally attached. The RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 may not be backed up by the power source. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a ROM (not shown) built in or external to the effect control microcomputer 100, and is input through the relay board 77. An effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103 in response to the capture signal (effect control INT signal) from 31. Hereinafter, the ROM built in or externally provided in the effect control microcomputer 100 is also referred to as an effect control ROM. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for temporarily storing (developing) image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data to be displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative symbols), and background image data. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The input port 107 mounted on the effect control board 80 is connected to wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal from the operation detection switch 38a. The operation detection signal input to the input port 107 is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100. The effect control microcomputer 100 executes a process for producing a game effect such as a notice effect based on the operation detection signal from the operation detection switch 38a.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). Any unidirectional circuit may be used as the restricting means. An effect control command or the like input to the input driver 102 is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 via the input port 103.

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 via the output port 106. Further, vibration motors 87 a, 87 b, 87 c that are provided in the vicinity of the upper effect LED 85 a, the middle effect LED 85 b, and the lower effect LED 85 c and vibrate the mounting portion of each LED are driven via the output port 106. Here, the vibration motor 87a vibrates the upper effect LED 85a, the vibration motor 87b vibrates the middle effect LED 85b, and the vibration motor 87c vibrates the lower effect LED 85c. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. In addition, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the side of the gaming machine frame 2 such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED. Further, current is supplied to the decoration LED 25, the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c provided on the game board 6 side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The audio data ROM 704 stores audio data corresponding to the sound number data. The sound data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period). The voice synthesizing IC 703 reads voice data for generating sound and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data from the voice data ROM 704 and temporarily stores (decompresses) the voice data in a predetermined voice RAM or the like, and then corresponds to the voice data. The generated audio signal (analog audio signal) is output to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27.

  In the production control microcomputer 100 mounted on the production control board 80, numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the production operation is updated by a built-in or external random number circuit (not shown). Count as possible. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the side of the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 80, random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, for temporary stop symbol determination before re-lottery. Random number value SR2, random number values SR3-1 to SR3-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols, random number SR4-1 for determining the redrawing effect execution and determining the promotion effect execution during the jackpot, SR4-2, random number value SR5-1 for determining probability change notification, random value SR5-2 for determining the jackpot promotion effect pattern, random number values SR6-1 and SR6-2 for determining the notice pattern type and for determining the notice pattern The numerical data indicating each is controlled so that it can be counted. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used.

  The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number. The random number circuit built in or externally provided in the effect control microcomputer 100 may be anything that counts numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values. The effect control CPU 101 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit, such as a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of the number may be counted. Alternatively, by executing predetermined processing such as scramble processing and arithmetic processing using all or part of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit built in or attached to the production control microcomputer 100, all of the random number values are obtained. Alternatively, numerical data indicating a part may be updated. Further, if the effect control board 80 is not equipped with a random number circuit, the effect control CPU 101 may use a random counter to count numerical data indicating all random number values.

  Random values SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “decided” symbols that are variable display results of ornament symbols, “left”, “middle”, “right” ”Is a random value used to determine a decorative symbol (final stop symbol) derived and displayed in each symbol display area 9L, 9C, 9R. Note that the final stop symbol here is finally stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends. It is three decorative designs. As an example, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”, and the random value SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is “1” to “ The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “96”.

  The random value SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol before the re-lottery is “left”, “middle”, “right” before the re-lottery effect is executed when the re-lottery effect that is promoted during the change is executed. Is a random value used for determining a decorative symbol of a normal jackpot combination that is temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”. The random numbers SR3-1 to SR3-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols are “left” when the variable display effect is executed when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are random values used for determining a decorative symbol (temporary stop symbol) to be temporarily stopped and displayed. As an example, the first pseudo-random temporary stop symbol determination random value SR3-1 takes a value in the range of “1” to “211”, and the second pseudo-simultaneous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR3-2. Takes a value in the range of “1” to “229”, and the random value SR3-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “311”. The random value SR4-1 for determining the re-lottery effect execution is a random number value used for determining whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “103”. The random number SR4-2 for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect is a random value used for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “101”. . The random value SR5-1 for determining the probability change notification is a random value for determining whether or not to notify that it is controlled to the high probability gaming state in the jackpot promotion effect, and is “1” to “100”. Takes a range value. The random value SR5-2 for determining the jackpot / medium promotion effect pattern is used to determine the jackpot / medium promotion effect pattern corresponding to the effect content as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance when the jackpot promotion effect is executed. Is a random value used in the above, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “200”.

  The random number SR6-1 for determining the notice pattern type indicates whether or not the notice effect is to be executed, and the notice pattern type classified based on the contents of the effect operation when it is executed. This is a random value used to determine the value and takes a value in the range of “1” to “111”. The random number value SR6-2 for determining the notice pattern is a random value used for determining the notice pattern included in the notice pattern type as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance when the notice effect is executed. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “201”.

  In addition to the effect control program, various data tables used for controlling the effect operation are stored in the effect control ROM built in or attached to the effect control microcomputer 100. For example, the effect control ROM stores a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 101 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the control pattern table, and the like. .

  16A to 16C show configuration examples of final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C stored in the effect control ROM. The final stop symbol determination tables 160 </ b> A to 160 </ b> C are tables that are referred to in order to determine a combination of decorative symbols to be a definite decorative symbol from among a plurality of predetermined non-reach combinations. For example, the final stop symbol determination table 160A includes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, which is the final symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L among the final symbols that are the predetermined non-reach combinations. FIG. 11 is a table referred to for determination based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. In the final stop symbol determination table 160A, the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 are numerical values that are compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol ( Decision value) is assigned. The final stop symbol determination table 160B displays the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, which is a finalized symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R, among the finalized symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine based on the final stop symbol FZ1-1 or the second final stop symbol determination random number SR1-2. In the final stop symbol determination table 160B, in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the symbol number “” of the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. Numerical values (determined values) to be compared with the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol are assigned to “1” to “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 160C displays the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3, which is a fixed ornament symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C among the predetermined ornament symbols that are a predetermined non-reach combination. This table is referred to for determination based on the final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the third final stop symbol determination random number SR1-3, and the like.

  Here, the effect control ROM stores table data constituting a left / right outcome determination table 161 as shown in FIG. 17, and a combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. Therefore, it is determined whether the left / right output type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. In the final stop symbol determination table 160C, the decorative symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is determined according to the determination result of whether the left / right outcome type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. Numerical values (determined values) to be compared with the random numbers SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol are assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8”.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B, a determination value is assigned to a portion where the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are the same. It is not done. With such a setting, when a confirmed decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the determined decorative symbol combination can be prevented from being a reach combination or a jackpot combination. In the final stop symbol determination table 160C, the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is a combination of predetermined decorative symbols. The decision value is not assigned. For example, even if it is other than the reach combination or the big hit combination, the part that becomes the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 2A, or the part that becomes the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. Furthermore, a determined value to be compared with the random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned to a portion that becomes a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG. The combination of decorative symbols as shown in FIG. 18 includes decorative symbols included in, for example, pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 and two chances of opening TC1 to TC4, and “left”, “middle”, “right”. Such that the arrangement order of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R is different from that of the player, the chance that the player will mistake the pseudo-ream chances GC1-GC8, the second chance of opening TC1-TC4, etc. Includes a combination of symbols. With such a setting, when determining a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination as the final stop symbol, the definitive decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous chance item GC1 to GC8, a second opening chance item TC1 to TC4, etc. It is possible to avoid a certain non-reach combination similar to such an opportunity.

  FIGS. 19A and 19B show a configuration example of final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B stored in the effect control ROM. The final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B are tables for determining a confirmed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination. For example, the final stop symbol determination table 162A includes a left final stop symbol FZ2-1 that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L among the fixed decorative symbols that are reach-losing combinations, and “right The right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is a confirmed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 9R, is referred to based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. It is a table. In the final stop symbol determination table 162A, symbol numbers “1” to “1” of decorative symbols (left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1, FZ2-2) that are the same as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. 8 ”is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 162B displays the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3, which is the final symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C, among the final symbol symbols that are the reach-losing combinations. It is a table referred in order to determine based on random number value SR1-3 for symbol determination.

  The middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 constituting the reach-losing combination is specified by a symbol difference which is a difference value between the symbol numbers of the decorative symbols as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. That is, in the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variation of the decorative symbol is started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, and “left” → “right” → “middle” In the predetermined order, for example, when the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result of the decorative pattern is derived and displayed, “left” and “right” other than the “middle” symbol display area 9C where the decorative symbol is derived and displayed last. After the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2, which are derived and displayed in the symbol display areas 9L and 9R, are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, the middle stop is determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162B. The difference (symbol difference) between the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 derived and displayed in the symbol display area 9C and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined at this time, a final decorative symbol which is the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 derived and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C is determined. In the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the third final stop symbol determination is performed for symbol differences “−2”, “−1”, “+1”, and “+2” corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value SR1-3 for use is assigned.

  20A to 20C show configuration examples of final stop symbol determination tables 163A to 163C stored in the effect control ROM. The final stop symbol determination tables 163A to 163C are tables that are referred to in order to determine a combination of decorative symbols to be a definite decorative symbol from a plurality of predetermined jackpot combinations. For example, in the final stop symbol determination table 163A, left symbols that are stopped and displayed together in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as the fixed decorative symbols that are usually the big hit combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2 and FZ3-3 based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 163A, the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” of the normal symbols that are the same as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are set. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is assigned. The final stop symbol determination table 163B displays the left, middle, and right symbols that are stopped and displayed together in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. It is a table referred to in order to determine the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 163B, the symbol numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” of the probability variation symbols that are the same as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are set. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is assigned. The final stop symbol determination table 163C displays a stop display in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as the confirmed decorative symbols that become one of the second opening chances TC1 to TC4. This table is referred to for determining the left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1, FZ4-2, and FZ4-3 based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 163C, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is assigned to each of the second release chances TC1 to TC4.

  FIG. 21A shows a configuration example of the re-lottery effect execution determination table 164A stored in the effect control ROM. The re-lottery effect execution determination table 164A determines whether or not the re-lottery effect is executed when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R non-probable change” or “15R probable change”. It is a table referred to in order to determine based on random number value SR4-1 for determination. In the re-lottery effect execution determination table 164A, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR4-1 for determining the re-lottery effect execution is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect.

  FIG. 21B shows a configuration example of the jackpot middle promotion effect execution determination table 164B stored in the effect control ROM. The jackpot promotion promotion execution determination table 164B shows whether or not the jackpot promotion promotion execution is executed when the variable display result is “big hit” and the jackpot type is “15R uncertain change” or “15R probability change”. It is a table referred in order to determine based on random number SR4-2 for promotion effect execution determination. In the big hit middle promotion effect execution determination table 164B, the value of the big hit continuation counter that counts the number of times that the 15R big hit has occurred in the high base state (probability change state or short time state) is “0” to “2”, ”To“ 6 ”or“ 7 ”or more, the numerical value (determined value) compared with the random value SR4-2 for determining the big hit middle promotion effect execution executes the big hit middle promotion effect Is assigned to the decision result.

FIG. 21C shows a configuration example of the probability change notification determination table 164C stored in the effect control ROM. The probability change notification determination table 164C, when executing the jackpot promotion effect, whether or not to notify that the jackpot promotion effect is shifted to the probability change state (whether or not the probability change notification is executed). It is a table referred to in order to determine based on random number value SR5-1 for determination. In the probability change notification determination table 164B, the value of the big hit continuation counter that counts the number of times that 15R big hit has occurred during the high base state (probability changed state or short time state) is “0” to “2”, or “3” to “3”. Depending on whether it is “6” or “7” or more, the numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value SR5-1 for determining the probability change notification is shifted to the probability change state in the jackpot promotion effect. It is assigned to "notification to" (promoted successful demonstration of big hit) and "not notified" (whether determination result to execute the probability variation notification) (big hit in the promotion failure game) either to one of the determination result of the . In addition, in the big success promotion effect during the big hit, it is notified that a high probability gaming state such as a probable change state is set. On the other hand, in the big hit mid-promotion failure production, it is not notified that a high probability gaming state is set.

  FIG. 21D shows a configuration example of the jackpot middle promotion effect pattern determination table 164D stored in the effect control ROM. The jackpot promotion effect pattern determination table 164D is referenced to determine the jackpot promotion effect pattern based on the random value SR5-2 for determining the lottery effect pattern when it is determined to execute the jackpot promotion effect pattern. It is a table. In the jackpot promotion promotion pattern determination table 164D, the jackpot promotion is based on whether the jackpot type is “15R non-probable change” or “15R probability change” and whether or not the probability change notification is executed in the jackpot promotion effect. The numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number SR5-2 for determining the effect pattern is the jackpot promotion effect pattern (promotion effect pattern A, promotion effect pattern B) corresponding to the effect content of the jackpot promotion effect. Assigned to the decision result.

  With the setting of the jackpot promotion effect pattern determination table 164D, the character used in the jackpot promotion effect in the promotion effect pattern A of the promotion success that executes the probability change notification and the promotion effect pattern A of the promotion failure that does not execute the probability change notification. The promotion effect during the big hit is executed in the similar effect mode such that they are the same. If the promotion is successful, it is notified that the jackpot type is “15R probability change” by displaying the contents and characters of the production. On the other hand, in the case of promotion failure, it is not notified that the jackpot type is “15R probability change” by displaying the contents of the production or characters. The same applies to the promotion effect pattern B.

  In the setting of the big hit middle promotion effect execution determination table 164B shown in FIG. 21B, the big hit middle promotion effect is less likely to be executed as the count value of the big hit continuation number counter is larger. In the setting of the probability variation notification determination table 164C shown in FIG. 21C, the probability variation notification is more easily performed as the count value of the big hit continuation number counter is larger. Further, in the setting of the big hit middle promotion effect pattern determination table 164D shown in FIG. 21D, the higher the count value of the big hit continuation number counter, the easier it is to be determined as the promotion effect pattern B. Thus, depending on the number of times of 15R big hit in the high base state (probability change state or short time state), the execution ratio of the jackpot promotion effect, the rate of successful promotion, and the determination rate of the jackpot promotion effect pattern are different. Since the range of production is widened, the interest of the game is improved. In the battle mode in the above-described mode C, it has been described that when a decorative pattern of a normal jackpot combination is derived and displayed, the teammate character performs an effect of losing to the enemy character and ends the battle mode. When the promotion effect is executed and it is notified that the transition to the probability change state is made, that is, the team member performs the same effect as when the team wins after losing the battle despite the fact that the teammate character lost the battle, and enters the probability change state. When it is informed that the transition is made (for example, when the effect is such that the battle mode continues despite being defeated by the battle), there is a disadvantage that the effects cannot be matched. Therefore, in this embodiment, such an inconvenience is reduced by reducing the number of executions of the jackpot promotion effect according to the number of continuation of the jackpot.

  As for the re-lottery effect, the re-lottery effect execution determination table 164A may be set so that the ratio executed according to the count value of the big hit continuation counter is different as in the big hit middle promotion effect. Also, for the re-lottery effect, when the count value of the big hit continuation counter is 1 or more (that is, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R uncertain change” or “15R positive change”. Correspondingly, the game state may not be executed when the game state is a certain change state or a short time state. In order to do this, when the count value of the big hit continuation counter is 0, the determination result of executing the re-lottery effect and the determination result of not executing the re-lottery effect are random numbers SR4-1 for determining the re-lottery effect execution. On the other hand, when the count value of the big hit continuation number counter is 1 or more, only the determination result for not executing the re-lottery effect is a random value SR4-1 for determining the re-lottery effect execution. A re-lottery effect execution determination table assigned with a numerical value (determination value) to be compared may be used. In the battle mode in the above-described mode C, it has been described that when a decorative pattern of a normal jackpot combination is derived and displayed, the teammate character performs an effect of losing to the enemy character and ends the battle mode. When it is informed that the production is executed and transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation jackpot combination is derived and displayed in the same manner as when the teammate wins after losing the battle despite losing the battle. Then, there arises a disadvantage that the alignment cannot be achieved. In this way, such inconvenience is reduced by reducing the number of times of the re-drawing effect according to the number of continuation of the big hit.

  FIG. 22 shows a configuration example of the pre-re-lottery temporary stop symbol determination table 165 stored in the effect control ROM. The pre-lottery temporary stop symbol determination table 165 is a random number value for determining the temporary stop symbol before the re-lottery, in the case where the re-lottery effect is executed, the decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped before the re-lottery effect is executed. It is a table referred to for determination based on SR2. In the temporary stop symbol determination table 165 before the re-lottery, the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “6” of the normal symbols that are the same as the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3. 8 ”is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol before re-lottery.

  FIG. 23 shows a configuration example of a pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol determination table used to determine a decorative symbol or the like that is temporarily stopped and displayed when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. In this embodiment, pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D shown in FIGS. 23 (A) to (D) are prepared in advance as the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table. It is stored in the area. Each of the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D includes a variation pattern designated by a variation pattern designation command and a finalized symbol to be a final stop symbol when a variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed. Is selected as a use table in accordance with the remaining number of display operations that become pseudo continuous fluctuations (total re-variation) executed until is stopped and displayed. The remaining number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is, for example, “0” in the decorative symbol fluctuation (pseudo continuous fluctuation) in which the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed, and the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed one time before that. The final stop symbol is set to “1” for the decorative symbol variation (pseudo continuous variation) and “2” for the decorative symbol variation (pseudo continuous variation) in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed twice before. This corresponds to how many times the pseudo-continuous variation (variation in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed) is executed until the pseudo continuous variation in which the fixed decorative symbol is displayed is stopped.

  As an example, the quasi-continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166A displays the quasi-continuous variation that is executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the designation of the variation pattern PA1-4. When the remaining number of times is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the right to be temporarily stopped in the “right” symbol display area 9R. The right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2 as the symbol, and the middle temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 as the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C are selected as the use table.

  In the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination table 166B, in addition to the variation pattern PA1-4, when a variation pattern in which the “simulated sequence” variable display effect is executed is designated, a final decorative symbol that becomes a final stop symbol is displayed. When the remaining number of pseudo continuous fluctuations executed until the stop display is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” symbol display area 9L, “ In the “right” symbol display area 9R, the right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol for temporary stop display, and the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3, which is the intermediate symbol in the “middle” symbol display area 9C, are determined. To be used as a usage table. In the setting example of the loss variation pattern and the big hit variation pattern shown in FIG. 8, as the variation patterns other than the variation pattern PA1-4, the variation patterns PB2-1 and PB2-2, the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2, and the variation pattern PB4. −1, PB4-2, variation patterns PA5-1 and PA5-2, and variation pattern PC1-3, the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed.

  In the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination table 166C, any one of the fluctuation pattern PB2-2, fluctuation pattern PA3-1, PA3-2, fluctuation pattern PB4-2, fluctuation pattern PA5-1, PA5-2 is designated. Accordingly, when the remaining number of pseudo continuous fluctuations executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “2”, the symbol display area 9L on the “left” is temporarily stopped. Left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, which is the left symbol, right temporary stop symbol KZ3-2, which is the right symbol to be displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and temporary stop display in the “middle” symbol display area 9C. It is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 as the intermediate symbol. The quasi-continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is a confirmed decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol in response to any of the variation patterns PA3-1, PA3-2, variation patterns PA5-1, PA5-2 being designated. Left temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L, when the remaining number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations executed until the symbol is stopped and displayed is “3”. In the “right” symbol display area 9R, the right temporary stop symbol KZ4-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the “middle” symbol display area 9C, the middle temporary stop symbol KZ4-3, which is the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed. It is selected as a usage table for determination.

  In the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A and 166B shown in FIGS. 23 (A) and 23 (B), the symbol numbers of the decorative symbols that become the final stop symbol (left final stop symbol) in the “left” symbol display area 9L, respectively. In accordance with “1” to “8”, the first pseudo-continuous temporary stop is applied to the pseudo-continuous chance eyes GC1 to GC8 constituted by the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value SR3-1 for design determination is assigned. In the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166C shown in FIG. 23 (C), the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, the right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2 determined using the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166B, Depending on whether the combination of the temporary stop symbol 2-3 is one of the pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8, the pseudo-continuous composed of the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1, KZ3-2 and KZ3-3. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR3-2 for determining the second pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol is assigned to the chances GC1 to GC8. In the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166D shown in FIG. 23D, the left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, the right temporary stop symbol KZ3-2, which are determined using the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166C, Depending on whether the combination of the temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 is the pseudo-continuous chance GC1-GC8, the pseudo-continuous composed of the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, KZ4-3 A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR3-3 for determining the third pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol is assigned to the chance points GC1 to GC8.

  By determining the temporary stop symbol using these pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D, for example, as shown in FIG. 24, the pseudo continuous variation (including the initial variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous”. ) In accordance with the number of times of execution), the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are displayed for the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. Either can be determined.

  FIG. 25 shows a configuration example of the notice pattern type determination table 169 stored in the effect control ROM. The notice pattern type determination table 169 is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the notice effect based on the random number value SR6-1 for determining the notice pattern type. In the notice pattern type determination table 169, whether or not the notice effect is to be executed is determined according to whether the variable display result is “losing”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, and the notice pattern type in the case of executing is set. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR6-1 for determining the notice pattern type is assigned to the decision result indicating which of the plurality of kinds (notice X, notice Y, notice Z). The notice pattern type is provided corresponding to the contents of the production. In this embodiment, the notice pattern type of the notice X corresponds to “character display”, the notice pattern type of the notice Y corresponds to “step-up operation”, and the notice pattern type of the notice Z is “jog”. Corresponds to "operation notice". Each notice pattern type includes a plurality of notice patterns, and after determining the notice effect type by determining the notice pattern type, more detailed effect contents are determined by determining the notice pattern included in the notice pattern type. .

  FIG. 26 shows a configuration example of a notice pattern determination table and the like stored in the effect control ROM. In this embodiment, notice pattern determination tables 170A to 170F shown in FIGS. 26A to 26F are prepared in advance as the notice pattern determination tables. The notice pattern determination tables 170A to 170F are used for determining one of a plurality of notice patterns prepared in advance based on the notice pattern type and the random number SR6-2 for determining the notice pattern when the notice effect is executed. It is a table to be referenced. Each of the notice pattern determination tables 170A to 170F is selected according to a table selection setting as shown in FIG. That is, the notice pattern determination tables 170A to 170C are selected if the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than the probability change state, and the notice pattern determination tables 170D to 170F are selected if the game state is the probability change state. In each of the notice pattern determination tables 170A to 170F, the variable display result is any one of “losing (non-reach)”, “losing (reach)”, “big hit (15R)”, “big hit (2R)”, and “small hit”. Depending on whether or not there is a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR6-2 for determining the notice pattern is assigned to any one of the notice patterns of the notice X1, X2, notice Y1, Y2, notice Z1, Z2. ing.

  Here, the variable display result of “losing (non-reach)” shown in FIGS. 26A to 26F indicates a case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. The variable display result of “losing (reach)” indicates a case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”. The variable display result of “big hit (15R)” indicates the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R non-probable change” or “15R positive change”, and the variable display result of “big hit (2R)” The result shows a case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R probability change”. The notice pattern determination tables 170A and 170D are notice patterns that execute a notice effect of “character display” used when the notice pattern type of the notice X is decided. The notice pattern determination tables 170B and 170E are notice patterns for executing the notice effect of the “step-up operation” used when the notice pattern type of the notice Y is decided. The notice pattern determination tables 170C and 170F are notice patterns for executing the notice effect of “jog operation notice” used when the notice pattern type of the notice Z is decided.

  In the notice pattern determination tables 170A to 170F, the determined value is assigned to each notice pattern so that the ratio determined for each notice pattern differs depending on which of the plurality of types of variable display results is decided. Further, when the notice pattern determination tables 170A to 170C and the notice pattern determination tables 170D to 170F are compared, the decision values are set so that the ratio of the notice patterns of the notices X2, Y2, and Z2 becomes high when the probability variation state is established. Assigned to each notice pattern. In this way, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the gaming state is a probable change state from the frequency at which the notice effect by the notice pattern of the notices X2, Y2, and Z2 is executed.

  In the notice pattern determination tables 170A to 170F, a decision value may be assigned to a decision result that does not execute the notice effect. Further, the notice pattern type (whether or not the notice effect is executed) and the notice pattern when the notice effect is executed may be determined using a single random value. Note that the types and number of character images to be displayed, the display color, and the like differ between the notice patterns X1 and X2 included in the notice pattern type of the notice X. Further, in the notice patterns Y1 and Y2 included in the notice pattern type of notice Y, the number of executions of the step-up operation and the contents of the rendering action in each step are different. Further, the notice patterns of notice Z1 and Z2 included in the notice pattern type of notice Z differ in the contents of the rendering operation executed in response to the operation of the jog operation unit 38.

  In the notice effect execution determination table 169 shown in FIG. 25 and the notice pattern determination tables 170A to 170F shown in FIGS. It is set so that it can be determined whether or not to execute, the notice pattern type and the notice pattern when it is executed. On the other hand, depending on which of the plurality of types of variation patterns indicated in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 31, whether or not to perform the announcement effect, and the announcement pattern in the case of execution The type and notice pattern may be determined.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, the production control ROM incorporated in or external to the production control microcomputer 100 corresponds to a plurality of production modes such as mode A, mode B, mode C, and mode N. Table data constituting the various effect control pattern tables 180A to 180D is stored. Further, the effect control ROM stores table data constituting a mode transition effect control pattern table 181 as shown in FIG. 27B, various effect control pattern tables 182 as shown in FIG. Has been. The mode transition effect control pattern table 181 only needs to store a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls in the mode transition effect executed in accordance with the mode transition as the mode transition effect control pattern. The various effect control pattern table 182 only needs to store a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls during the period when the game is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state. . Specifically, a big hit / medium effect control pattern corresponding to the big hit / medium promotion effect pattern when the big hit / medium promotion effect is executed is stored. The various effect control pattern tables 182 may be configured to be included in each of the effect control pattern tables 180A to 180D corresponding to the effect modes of mode A, mode B, mode C, and mode N. In this case, the contents of the effect operation in the period controlled in the big hit game state or the small hit game state may be made different depending on which of the plurality of types of effect modes in the pachinko gaming machine 1. it can.

  In each of the effect control pattern tables 180A to 180D shown in FIG. 27 (A), effects are produced according to whether the effect mode in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a plurality of modes A, mode B, mode C, or mode N. It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of control of various production operations having different modes as production control patterns. For example, each of the effect control pattern tables 180A to 180D includes a symbol variation control pattern table 185 shown in FIG. 28A and a notice effect control pattern table 186 shown in FIG.

  In the symbol variation control pattern table 185, in response to a plurality of variation patterns and the like, an effect display device in a period from the start of variable display of ornament symbols until the finalized symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed 9 shows control contents of various effect operations, such as a decorative display variable display operation on the display screen 9, an effect display operation in a reach effect, and a decorative symbol display operation in a variable display effect such as “pseudo-run” or “slip”. It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data as symbol variation control patterns. In the notice effect control pattern table 186, a plurality of types of data indicating the control contents of the effect operation in the notice effect may be stored corresponding to a plurality of notice patterns prepared in advance as the notice effect control pattern. In addition, each production | presentation control pattern table 180A-180D is good also as an address management table which manages the memory | storage address of the pattern data which comprises multiple types of production control patterns. In this case, in the effect control ROM, table data constituting each effect control pattern table 180A to 180D is stored in a predetermined storage area, and a pattern constituting each effect control pattern in an area different from this storage area. Data only needs to be stored.

  In the symbol variation control pattern stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 185 and the announcement effect control pattern stored in the announcement effect control pattern table 186, the effect mode in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a plurality of modes A, B, and modes. Regardless of whether the mode is C or mode N, data indicating the control content of the common performance operation may be included. In this case, for the data indicating the control content of the rendering operation common to each rendering mode, the common rendering control pattern table provided separately from the rendering control pattern tables 180A to 180D corresponding to each rendering mode, etc. It may be stored as a pattern. As an example, the control content of the rendering operation associated with the variable display of the decorative symbols in the period before the variable display state of the decorative symbols becomes the reach state is individual for each rendering mode. It is specified by the symbol variation control pattern stored in 180A to 180D. On the other hand, the control content of the rendering operation including the reach rendering after the variable display state of the decorative symbol has reached the reach state is common to each rendering mode, and the design fluctuation stored in the common rendering control pattern table It may be specified by a control pattern.

  FIG. 29A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. Mode transition effect control pattern stored in mode transition effect control pattern table 181, various effect control patterns stored in various effect control pattern table 182, symbol variation control pattern stored in symbol variation control pattern table 185, and notice effect Various effect control patterns such as the notice effect control pattern stored in the control pattern table 186 include, for example, an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, movable member control data, and an end code. It is composed of control data for controlling various performance operations, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various performance controls, the timing of switching the performance control, and the like in time series. In addition, in the effect control pattern, for example, a period for effectively detecting an operation on the operation unit such as a jog button or a jog dial included in the operation unit 38, an operation for designating control contents of the effect operation when it is detected effectively, etc. Detection control data and the like may be included. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 shown in FIG. A determination value corresponding to the operation execution time (effect time) is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 31, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer 100. Data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image on the display screen of the effect display device 9, for example, data indicating the change mode of each decoration symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the effect display device 9. The audio control data includes data indicating an audio output mode from the speaker 27, such as data indicating an output mode of a sound effect or the like that is interlocked with the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the audio control data is data that specifies an audio output operation from the speaker 27. The lamp control data includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitter, such as the decoration LED 25 and the frame LED 28. That is, the lamp control data is data for designating the lighting operation of the light emitter. The movable member control data includes data indicating an operation mode of the movable member such as a movable member 78 connected to the motor 86, for example. That is, the movable member control data is data that designates a driving operation of the movable member. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 29B is a diagram for describing various rendering operations that are executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. In the production control microcomputer 100, the production control CPU 101 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches one of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 27 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to blink the light emitter in a mode specified by the lamp control data, and a mode specified by the movable member control data. Then, the control for operating the movable member 78 is performed. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The effect control CPU 101 in the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the effect control pattern based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, for example, when starting variable display of decorative symbols. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the effect control ROM and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM. It is also possible to temporarily store the storage address of the pattern data constituting the effect control ROM in a predetermined area of the RAM and designate the reading position of the stored data in the effect control ROM. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. If they match, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect devices (effect display device 9, speaker 27, decoration LED 25, and frame LED 28) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. And the like, and the control of the movable member such as the movable member 78 is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, movable member control data # 1 to movable member control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device, and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control microcomputer 100 to the VDP 109, the audio output board 70, and the like. In the VDP 109 that has received a command from the effect control microcomputer 100, the image data indicated by the command is read from the CGROM and temporarily stored in the VRAM. In the audio output board 70 that has received a command from the production control microcomputer 100, for example, the voice synthesis IC 703 reads the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM 704 and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. Expand.

  For example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 30 is provided in the RAM incorporated in or attached to the effect control microcomputer 100 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. It has been. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 30 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types of states whose states can be updated according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state on the display screen of the effect display device 9, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation on the display screen of the effect display device 9. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 31, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 560 is activated, and the CPU 56 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 56 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 55 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 560 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 56 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 56 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a loop process may be entered after executing a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the previous power supply stop. When the CPU 56 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 31 is started, the CPU 56 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 32a, the first and second start port switches 13a, The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as 14a and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 31 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 56 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol are displayed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of the display operation in the display 8b and setting of the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 56 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 10 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade. In the normal symbol process, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probable change state or a short time state, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 as compared to the normal state. Settings and control are performed. For example, when the state is the probability variation state or the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 10 controls the normal symbol variable display time in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, or each time the normal symbol game variable display Control for improving the probability that the result is “per normal” than in the normal state, and the tilting time of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal” Control for making it longer than that in the normal state, control for increasing the number of tilts compared with that in the normal state, or setting for performing a part or all of these controls in combination are performed.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 transmits the control command from the main board 31 to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 80 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, the effect control among the output ports included in the I / O 57 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 80, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. When the command control process is finished, the game control timer interrupt process is finished after the interrupt is permitted.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 31 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 56 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). 33 and 34 are flowcharts showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the CPU 56 first reads the input port data stored in the predetermined input port register (step S201). Here, the input port register is a register in which, for example, a bit value indicating an input state of an external signal at an input port included in the I / O 57 is stored. In this embodiment, the input port data stored in the bit number [0] of the input port register is the input state (OFF / ON) of the first start winning signal that becomes the detection signal transmitted from the first start port switch 13a. ), And the input port data stored in the bit number [1] of the input port register is the input state (OFF / OFF) of the second start winning signal that becomes the detection signal of the game ball transmitted from the second start port switch 14a. ON).

  It is determined whether or not the bit value [1] of the input port register read in step S201 is “1” (step S202). At this time, if the bit value is “1” (step S202; Yes), the second start winning determination count value that is the stored value of the second start winning determination counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is, for example, Update so as to count up by adding 1 (step S203). On the other hand, when it is determined as “0” in step S202 (step S202; No), the second start winning determination counter is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0”. (Step S204).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S203 and S204, it is determined whether or not the bit value in the bit number [0] of the input port register read in step S201 is “1” (step S205). At this time, if the bit value is “1” (step S205; Yes), the first start winning determination count value that is the stored value of the first starting winning determination counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is, for example, It is updated so as to count up by adding 1 (step S206). On the other hand, when it is determined as “0” in step S205 (step S205; No), the first start winning determination counter is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0”. (Step S207).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S206 and S207, it is determined whether or not the first start winning determination count value has reached a predetermined determination value (for example, “2”) predetermined as a winning determination value. (Step S208). At this time, if the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (step S208; Yes), the starting port buffer value that is the stored value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is “1” is set (step S209). Further, the first start winning determination counter is cleared and the count value is initialized to “0” (step S210).

  If the first start winning determination count value has not reached the winning determination value in Step S208 (Step S208; No), it is determined whether or not the second starting winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (Step S211). ). At this time, if the second start winning determination count value has not reached the winning determination value (step S211; No), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (step S211; Yes), the start port buffer value is set to “2” (step S212). Further, the second start winning determination counter is cleared and the count value is initialized to “0” (step S213).

  After executing one of the processes of Steps S210 and S213, the CPU 56 reads the reserved storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (Step S214). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is read, and the starting port buffer value is When it is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the read value in step S214 has reached a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S215 in FIG. 34). At this time, if the read value in step S214 does not reach the upper limit value, the starting condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is effectively established. For example, after it is determined in step S208 shown in FIG. 33 that the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value, it is determined in step S215 that the read value has not reached the upper limit value. A first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the one special symbol indicator 8a and variable display of the decorative symbol is established. If it is determined in step S211 shown in FIG. 33 that the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value and then it is determined in step S215 that the read value has not reached the upper limit value, The second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the two special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the decorative symbol is established.

  Thus, when the read value has not reached the upper limit value in step S215 (step S215; No), 1 is added to the reserved storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S216). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, 1 is added to the first reserved memory number count value, and when the starting port buffer value is “2”, 1 is added to the second reserved memory number count value. Then, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the total reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter indicating the total reserved memory number that is the total value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number ( Step S217).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S217, the CPU 56 sets and stores start data corresponding to the start port buffer value at the head of the empty area in the start data storage unit 151C (step S218). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, start data indicating “first” is set, and when the start port buffer value is “2”, start data indicating “second” is set. The CPU 56 then selects a random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random value for determining the variation pattern type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 and the random counter. Numerical data representing the numerical value MR3 is extracted (step S219). Numeric data indicating each random value extracted in this way is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value, thereby storing each random value (step S220). . For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1, MR2, and MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while the starting port buffer value is “2”. In some cases, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1, MR2, and MR3 is set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  After the random value is stored in step S220, a winning specific pattern determination process is executed (step S221).

  Further, the CPU 56 stores the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 54 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, etc. Is set to transmit (step S222). The first start opening winning designation command table is configured to include setting data for transmitting the first starting opening winning designation command and setting data for transmitting the reserved storage number notification command. When the second start opening winning designation command table is configured to include setting data for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command and setting data for transmitting the pending storage number notification command As the processing of steps S221 and S222, only the storage address of the command table corresponding to the start port buffer value is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, out of the first start port winning designation command table and the second start port winning designation command table. do it. For example, the reserved memory number notification command set in this way is performed by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 31 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example, and so on. Subsequent to the winning prize designation command, it is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

  If the read value has reached the upper limit value in step S215 (step S215; Yes), or after executing the process of step S222, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is “1” or “2”. Determination is made (step S223). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is “1” (step S223; “1”), the starting port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S224), and then FIG. The process proceeds to step S211 shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “2” (step S223; “2”), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to “0” (step S225). The start winning determination process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, when both of the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a detect a start winning of a game ball that is effective at the same time, both processes are executed by processing executed within 2 milliseconds. A process based on the fact that the switch has detected a start winning of a valid game ball is executed. That is, when it is determined in step S208 shown in FIG. 33 that the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value, the processing in steps S209, S210, and S214 shown in FIG. After the processing of steps S215 to S222 shown in FIG. 33 is executed, the processing of step S224 is executed in response to the start port buffer value being “1” in step S223, and then the processing of step S211 shown in FIG. Proceed to processing. When it is determined in step S211 that the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value, the processing of steps S212 to S214 shown in FIG. 33 is executed, and then steps S215 to S222 shown in FIG. After executing the process, the process of step S225 is executed in response to the fact that the start port buffer value is “2” in step S223, and then the start winning determination process is terminated. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a detect a valid start winning of a game ball at the same time, it is possible to reliably complete the processing based on the detection of both effective start winnings.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the winning specific pattern determination process executed in step S220 of FIG. In this embodiment, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol display result is displayed as “big hit” or “small hit” in special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 32, FIG. 38) described later. "Or whether or not the jackpot type is determined, and in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 32, FIG. 39) described later, the variation pattern type and the variation pattern are determined. . On the other hand, separately from these determinations, the CPU 56 executes the specific pattern determination process at the time of winning in step S220 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Thus, it is specified in advance whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit”, and whether or not the decorative pattern variation pattern is a variation pattern with at least super reach. Thus, it is predicted that the reach effect of the super reach will be executed before the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, and based on this prediction result, On the control board 80 side, it is determined whether or not to produce an effect indicating that the effect control CPU 101 or the like is super reach.

  In the winning specific pattern determination process shown in FIG. 35, the CPU 56 first specifies a special figure display result corresponding to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S219 of FIG. 34 (step S351). ). For example, in the process of step S351, the special figure display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 10 is selected and set in the use table. Here, when setting the usage table, the storage address (head address) of the table data in the ROM may be set, for example, in a table pointer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM. Subsequently, by referring to the special figure display result determination table 130 set in the use table, the special figure display result corresponding to the random value MR1 extracted in step S219 is specified. More specifically, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is compared with the determined value stored in the special figure display result determination table 130, and the special figure display to which the determined value matching the random value MR1 is assigned. Specify whether the result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result specified in step S351 is “big hit” (step S352). At this time, if the specified special figure display result is “big hit” (step S352; Yes), the big hit type corresponding to the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type extracted in step S219 of FIG. 34 is specified. (Step S353). For example, in the process of step S353, the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 9 is selected and set in the use table. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in the use table, the jackpot type corresponding to the random value MR2 extracted in step S219 is specified. Here, the setting of the variable special figure designation buffer value in the jackpot type determination table 131 is replaced with the starting port buffer value, and the starting winning port (first starting winning port or second starting winning port) where the game ball is detected is read. The corresponding jackpot type may be specified. In this way, it is determined whether or not the big hit type identified in step S353 is “15R non-probability change” or “15R probability change” other than “2R probability change” (step S354).

  When it is determined in step S352 that the special figure display result is not “big hit” (step S352; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “lost” (step S355). When it is determined in step S354 that the big hit type is other than “2R probability change” (step S354; Yes), or when it is determined in step S355 that the special figure display result is “lost” (step S355; Yes), it is determined whether or not the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S219 in FIG. 34 is within the specific pattern common range (step S356).

  Here, in the setting examples of the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C shown in FIG. 12C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D shown in FIG. Regardless of the number of memories, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the range of “230” to “251”, the variation includes at least a variation pattern with super reach (super reach α or super reach β). The pattern type is CA2-4. Further, in the setting example of the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 12A, when the jackpot type is “15R non-probable variation”, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is “100” to “251”. ”, Or when the random hit value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the range of“ 50 ”to“ 251 ”when the jackpot type is“ 15R probability variation ”, at least super reach is achieved. The variation pattern type CA3-3 including the associated variation pattern is determined. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 36, if the random value MR3 is within the range of “230” to “251”, it is assumed that it is within the range of the specific pattern common range. It may be determined whether or not. In the determination in step S356, the specific pattern common range may be specified by referring to the settings of the variation pattern type determination tables 132A, 132C, and 132D, or the specific pattern common range may be previously stored in a predetermined area of the ROM. A range (“230” to “251” in this embodiment) may be stored and referred to. Thus, by storing the comparison value in the ROM in advance, the processing load on the CPU 56 can be reduced.

  Alternatively, when it is determined in step S354 that the big hit type is other than “2R probability variation” and in step S355, it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost”, the specific pattern common range is set. You may make it differ. For example, if it is determined in step S355 that the special figure display result is “lost”, the random value MR3 may be within the range of “230” to “251” as shown in FIG. For example, it is assumed to be within the common pattern common range. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S354 that the jackpot type is other than “2R probability variation”, the random value MR3 is in the range of “100” to “251” as shown in FIG. If it is within, it is assumed to be within the specific pattern common range.

  When it is determined in step S356 that it is within the specific pattern common range (step S356; Yes), it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S357). If the starting port buffer value is “1” (step S357; “1”), the command B101H (first starting port winning designation command for notifying that it is within the specific pattern common range at the time of the first starting winning bid ( Settings are made to transmit the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 (see FIG. 6C) (step S358). If it is determined in step S357 that the start port buffer value is “2” (step S357; “2”), the second start port for notifying that it is within the specific pattern common range at the time of the second start winning. Settings are made to transmit a command B201H (see FIG. 6C) serving as a winning designation command from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 (step S359).

  When it is determined in step S354 that the big hit type is “2R probability change” (step S354; No), the special figure display result is determined to be “small hit” instead of “losing” in step S355. When (step S355; No), and when it is determined in step S356 that it is not within the specific pattern common range (step S356; No), the start port buffer value is “1” or “2”. It is determined whether or not there is (step S360). Here, if the start port buffer value is “1” in step S360 (step S360; “1”), the first start port winning designation command for notifying that the specific pattern is out of the common range at the first start winning. Is set to transmit the command B100H (see FIG. 6C) to the effect control board 80 from the main board 31 (step S361). If it is determined in step S360 that the start port buffer value is “2” (step S360; “2”), the second start port for notifying that it is out of the specific pattern common range at the time of the second start winning. Settings are made to transmit a command B200H (see FIG. 6C) serving as a winning designation command from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 (step S362).

  By executing the specific pattern determination process at the time of winning, when a game ball that has passed through the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening is detected, the game state or special figure game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suspended. Regardless of the total number of reserved memory as the number of memories, whether or not a specific fluctuation pattern with at least super reach is specified is specified, and the first start opening prize designation command and the second starting opening prize designation differ depending on the identification result The command can be transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

  After executing the processing of step S358, S359, S361, or S362, the winning display result notification command D0XXH corresponding to the special figure display result specified in step S351 is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. Is set (step S363), and the winning specific pattern determination process is terminated. The special figure display result determined at the time of winning by the winning display result notification command D0XXH can be notified from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. On the side of the effect control board 80, the special figure display result determined at the time of winning is displayed. It is possible to execute the production based on the result.

  After the start winning determination process of step S101 shown in FIG. 32 is executed, one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 shown in FIG. 32 is selected and executed according to the value of the special process flag. The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol storage unit 151A and the second special diagram storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not the special game is started by the display 8b. Also, in the special symbol normal process, whether the variable display result of the special symbol, the decorative symbol, the attached symbol or the like is “big hit” or “small hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. No is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the final special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b). Either a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a pre-decision result on whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, a reach decision result on whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, etc. The process includes determining a variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types, and determining a variation pattern as a plurality of types in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation processing includes processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or incremented by one. Regardless of whether the game is a special game using the first special graphic by the first special symbol display 8a or a special game using the second special graphic by the second special symbol display 8b, a common timer is used. The elapsed time is measured. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol variation process in step S112 is performed by the first special symbol display 8a using the first special symbol in the special symbol game or the second special symbol display 8b. It suffices if it is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the game by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display unit 8a and the second special symbol display unit 8b are used to stop the variation of the special symbol, and to stop and display the fixed special symbol resulting in the variable display result of the special symbol. A process for setting is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag or the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on. When the big hit flag is on, the special process flag value is set to “ Update to 4 ". When the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. Further, when both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are OFF, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The pre-opening process for the special winning opening in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big winning opening is a process for starting the execution of the round in the big winning gaming state and setting the opening for the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” Etc. are included. In this case, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set in accordance with whether the big hit type is “15R uncertain variation”, “15R certain variation”, or “2R certain variation”. Good. As an example, when the big hit type is controlled to the 15 round big hit state corresponding to “15R non-probable change” or “15R probable change”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”. ”And the number of times of opening of the big prize opening, which is the number of round executions, is set to“ 15 ”. On the other hand, when the big hit type is controlled to the 2 round big hit state corresponding to “2R probability change”, the upper limit of the period in which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”. In addition to setting, the number of times of opening of the big winning opening, which is the number of executions of the round, is set to “2 times”.

  The special winning opening releasing process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. This process during opening of the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the elapsed time measured, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. Processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the special winning opening door solenoid 21 may be executed.

  The post-opening processing for the special winning opening in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. The post-opening process for the big prize opening includes a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big prize opening is in an open state has reached the maximum number of open big prize openings, This includes a process for making a setting for transmitting an end designation command when hit.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed by the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the frame LED 28, the decoration LED 25, etc. For example, a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period of time elapses and a process of performing various settings for controlling to a special game state or a normal state corresponding to a jackpot type are included.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits is a setting for starting the execution of variable winning action in the small hit game state and opening the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, etc. The processing to perform is included. At this time, for example, in response to the variable display result being “small hit”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”, and the big winning opening in the variable winning operation is set. The number of times of opening may be set to “twice”.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big winning opening to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 21 for the big winning opening door may be executed.

  The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In this small hit end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an effect operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is executed by the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the frame LED 28, the decoration LED 25, etc. It includes processing to wait until it is done. Here, when the small hit gaming state is finished, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag and the short time flag.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 38, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the total reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 is “0”, that is, the first reserved memory count. It is determined whether or not the total reserved memory number that is the total value of the second reserved memory numbers is “0” (step S231). At this time, if the total pending storage number count value is other than “0” (step S231; No), start data is read from the start data storage unit 151C (step S232). Here, the start data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the start data storage unit 151C may be read.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the total reserved memory number count value, the total reserved memory number is updated so as to be decremented by 1, and the start data storage unit 151C receives the hold number “1”. The storage contents of the start data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “8”) are shifted up by one entry (step S233). Then, it is determined whether the start data read in step S232 is “first” or “second” (step S234).

  When it is determined in step S234 that the start data is “first” (step S234; first), a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a is started. In response to the establishment of the 1 start condition, the variable special figure designation buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “1” (step S235). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S234 that the start data is “second” (step S234; second), a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b is started. In response to the establishment of the second start condition, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” (step S236).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S235 and S236, the hold data is read from the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start-up data read in step S232 (step S237). For example, when the start data is “first”, as the hold data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a random value for determining the special figure display result The numerical data indicating MR1, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are read out. On the other hand, when the start data is “second”, the hold data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B is used for determining the special figure display result. The numerical data indicating the random number MR1, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are respectively read out. The numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR1 to MR3 read out in this way is temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM, for example, by storing it in a special figure changing random value buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. It only has to be done.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S237, the pending storage number count value corresponding to the start data is decremented by 1, and an entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the hold number “ The stored contents of the pending data stored in the entries corresponding to “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry (step S238). For example, when the start data is “first”, the first reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1, and the stored content of the held data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A is shifted upward by one entry. Let On the other hand, when the start data is “second”, the second reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1, and the stored contents of the reserved data in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B are stored one entry at a time. Shift to the top.

  Following the processing of step S238, the special figure display is used as a use table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result, is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”. The result determination table 130 is selected and set (step S239). The CPU 56 refers to the special figure display result determination table 130 set in this manner, so that the numerical data indicating the special figure display result determination random number MR1 read in step S237 is “big hit” or “small”. Whether to display the special figure display result as "big hit", "small hit", or "lose" depending on which of the decision values assigned to each special figure display result of "Bon" or "Lose" Is determined (step S240). Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S240 is “big hit” (step S241).

  If it is determined in step S241 that it is a “hit” (step S241; Yes), the big win flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S242). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S243). By referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in this way, based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type read in step S237, “15R uncertain change”, “15R probability change”, “2R probability change” ”Or any of the jackpot types prepared in advance (step S244). If the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in the process of step S236, the decision value is not assigned to the big hit type “2R probability change” in the big hit type decision table 131. The jackpot type is not determined to be “2R probability change”. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, the determined jackpot type is stored, for example, by updating the jackpot type buffer value that is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 ( Step S245). As an example, if the jackpot type is “15R uncertain variation”, the jackpot type buffer value may be “0”, “15R certain variation” may be “1”, and “2R certain variation” may be “2”. .

  When it is determined in step S241 that it is not “big hit” (step S241; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S246). When it is determined that the game is “small hit” (step S246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S247).

  If it is determined in step S246 that the game is not “small hit” (step S246; No), or after performing any of the processes in steps S245 and S247, whether to control the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. A determined special symbol is set in accordance with the result of the prior determination as to whether or not, and further, the determination result of the jackpot type when the jackpot game state is set (step S248). As an example, when it is determined in step S246 that the special figure display result is not “small hit”, a lost symbol is obtained corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “lost”. The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S246 that the special figure display result is “small hit”, the small figure corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “small hit”. The special symbol indicating the number “2” as the symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. When it is determined in step S241 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the big hit symbols “1”, “3”, “7” are determined according to the big hit type determination result in step S244. Any of the special symbols indicating the numbers "" is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “15R non-probable change”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that becomes the non-probable big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “15R probability change”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the probability change big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. In accordance with the determination result that the big hit type is “2R probability variation”, the special symbol indicating the number of the 2R probability variation big hit symbol “1” is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . If the total number of reserved memories is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step S250), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. In the demonstration display setting in step S250, for example, a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the production display device 9 is sent from the main board 31 to the production control board 80. In contrast, it is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not yet transmitted, the transmission setting of the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed by setting the storage address of the customer waiting demonstration designation command table in the ROM in the transmission command buffer, for example. The customer waiting demonstration designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, for example, by executing the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 31 after the special symbol process is completed. Is done.

  In this embodiment, the start data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the start data storage unit 151C is read, and the read start data is either “first” or “second”. It is determined whether there is a special symbol game on the corresponding special symbol display 8, but if there is "second" start data, the second special symbol display 8b uses the second special symbol display 8b. A special game using special maps may be executed preferentially. For this purpose, for example, when the CPU 56 reads the start data from the start data storage unit 151C in step S232, it is determined whether there is “second” start data, and there is “second” start data. The “second” start data stored in association with the smallest hold number may be read out. As shown in FIG. 11, in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b, the jackpot type does not become “2R probability variation”. When the second start winning opening 14 corresponding to the “second” starting data is controlled to be high open, it is likely to be an advantageous big hit, and the game value when the second start winning opening 14 is controlled to be high open. Can be further enhanced.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 39, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). At this time, if the big hit flag is ON (step S261; Yes), the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 132A is selected and set as a use table for determining any of the plurality of fluctuation pattern types (step S261). S262). Further, for example, by reading the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155, the big hit type is identified as “15R uncertain change”, “15R probability change”, or “2R probability change”. (Step S263).

  When the big hit flag is off in step S261 (step S261; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S264). If the small hit flag is on (step S264; Yes), the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types ( Step S265).

  When the small hit flag is OFF in step S264 (step S264; No), it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction control in the probability variation state or the time reduction state is being executed is set (step S264). S266). The time reduction flag is set to the on state when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the probability change state or the time reduction state, and is cleared to the off state when the probability change state or the time reduction state ends. More specifically, after the hour / hour flag is set to ON in the process of ending the big hit gaming state, the hour / hour count count value has reached “0”, and the special figure display result is “big hit”. Corresponding to the end of the game, the time reduction flag is cleared and the game is turned off.

  When the time reduction flag is OFF in step S266 (step S266; No), it is determined whether or not the total reserved storage number count value is “3” or more (step S267). If the total reserved storage number is less than “3” (step S267; No), the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types. Is selected and set (step S268). On the other hand, when the time reduction flag is on in step S266 (step S266; Yes), or when the total reserved storage number count value is “3” or more in step S267 (step S267; Yes), the fluctuation occurs. A loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of pattern types (step S269). Even when the time reduction flag is on in step S266, it is determined whether or not the total number of reserved storage is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, “1” or the like), and a different determination table is set according to the determination result. You may choose. For example, when the hourly flag is on, if the total reserved memory number is “0”, the process proceeds to step S268 to select and set the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C, while the total reserved memory number If the value is “1” or more, the process may proceed to step S269 to select and set the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S263, S265, S268, and S269, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type stored in the special figure variation random value buffer or the like. By referring to the use table set in any one of S263, S265, S268, and S269, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S270). Here, in the process of step S270, the variation pattern type determination extracted from the random number circuit 503 or the like when the start winning is detected and stored as the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A or the second special figure hold storage unit 151B is determined. The variation pattern type is determined based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3. Therefore, it is possible to match the determination result of whether or not it is within the range of the specific pattern common range when the start winning is detected and the determination result of the variation pattern type by the process of step S270, and specify when the start winning is detected. It can be prevented that a variation pattern type different from a variation pattern type including a specific variation pattern with super reach is determined despite being determined to be within the pattern common range. Further, based on the establishment of the first start condition, the first special symbol display 8a determines the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol, or the second start Regardless of whether the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display 8b based on the fact that the condition is satisfied, a common random counter, etc. Using the numerical data indicating the common random number value MR3 used for determining the variation pattern type updated by the above, the common processing module can determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types.

  After the variation pattern type is determined in step S270, the loss variation pattern determination table 133A and the hit variation pattern determination are performed according to whether the special figure display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”. One of the tables 133B is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns (step S271). Subsequently, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table set in step S271 based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern (step S272). The numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern may be extracted from the random number circuit 503, the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, or the like when the process of step S272 is executed, or the first start winning prize The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A and the second special figure reservation memory, together with random numbers MR1 to MR3, are extracted when a game ball that has entered the mouth or the second start winning opening (start winning prize) is detected. You may memorize | store as pending data in the part 151B.

  In the process of step S272, whether or not the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol is determined by the first special symbol display 8a based on the first start condition being satisfied, Regardless of whether or not the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol indicator 8b based on the fact that the second starting condition is satisfied, Using the numerical data indicating the common random number MR4 that is used for determining the variation pattern updated by a counter or the like, the variation pattern can be determined as one of a plurality of types by a common processing module. Further, in the process of step S272, regardless of the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S270, a plurality of types of variation patterns are generated by a common processing module using numerical data indicating the common random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Either can be determined.

  After the change pattern is determined in step S272, a special figure change time which is a variable symbol display time corresponding to the change pattern determination result is set (step S273). Thereafter, according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the above (step S274). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b is performed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S274, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the special symbol change are performed (step S275). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 56 performs a gaming state designation command, a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with setting data indicating the storage address (first address) in the ROM of the first variation start command table prepared in advance. In the designated transmission command buffer, the data is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 56 performs a gaming state designation command, a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is a buffer designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Store in the area. When such setting in step S275 is performed, every time the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 31 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the main board 31 applies to the effect control board 80. Various production control commands are sequentially transmitted. FIG. 40 is a timing chart showing an example of an operation of transmitting an effect control command from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 when starting the variable display of special symbols in the special figure game. When the start condition for starting the special figure game is satisfied, the CPU 56 generates a timer interrupt by executing the command control processing in step S17 shown in FIG. 31 based on the transmission setting in step S279 shown in FIG. Each time it occurs, a gaming state designation command, a first variation start command or a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, and a pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Note that the order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result notification command is transmitted first, the gaming state designation command, the first variation start command, or the second variation start command , A variation pattern designation command, and a pending storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order, and each command (for example, a first variation start command or a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, etc.) may be transmitted. It may be transmitted within the same timer interrupt. In addition, in the example of FIG. 40, the variation of the special symbol is started when the variation pattern designation command is transmitted. However, the variation is not limited to this. You may make it start the fluctuation | variation of a special symbol at the time of display result notification command transmission. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step S276), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 41, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S291). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S291; Yes), the big hit start production waiting time is set (step S292). For example, in the process of step S 292, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the jackpot start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the process of step S292, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 54 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Should be stored in. Thereafter, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S294). In addition, a setting for ending the special game state such as the probability change state or the short time state is performed (step S295). For example, in step S295, a process for clearing the probability variation flag and the time-shortening flag to turn it off, and a process for clearing the time-shortening counter for counting the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed until the time-shortening state ends. Etc. may be executed. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S296), and then the special symbol stop process is ended.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S291 (step S291; No), it is determined whether the small hit flag is on (step S297). At this time, if the small hit flag is ON (step S297; Yes), a small hit start start waiting time is set (step S298). For example, in the process of step S298, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the small hitting start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer. Subsequently, as in the process of step S293, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S299). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S300). Further, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for small hits (step 301).

  If the small hit flag is off in step S297 (step S297; No), the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S302). After executing one of the processes in steps S301 and S302, it is determined whether or not to end the special game state such as the probability change state or the short time state (step S303), and then the special symbol stop process is ended. For example, in the process of step S303, when the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction count value which is the stored value of the time reduction counter is updated by, for example, subtracting one. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated short time count value matches a predetermined short time end determination value (for example, “0” or the like). At this time, if it coincides with the time reduction end determination value, the time reduction control may be ended by clearing the time reduction flag and turning it off. On the other hand, if it does not coincide with the time reduction end determination value, the state of the time reduction flag may be maintained and the process of step S303 may be ended. For the probability change state in which the time reduction flag is on and the probability change flag is on, time reduction control is continuously performed until the next variable display result is “big hit”. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the time reduction control is to be ended even in the probability variation state, and the time reduction control may be ended based on the determination result of the end. Thus, when the time-shortening control is finished, the probability variation control may be terminated at the same time, so that the normal state may be obtained. For the probability variation control, until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” or further predetermined It may be continued until the number of special figure games is executed.

  In the process of step S303, for example, numerical data indicating a random value for probability variation control termination determination is extracted from a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, and probability variation control termination determination stored in advance in the ROM 54 or the like is performed. It may be determined whether or not the probability variation control is ended by referring to the table or when the number of executions of the special figure game during the probability variation control reaches a predetermined probability variation end determination value. On the other hand, in the process of step S303, the process for ending the probability variation control may not be executed, and the probability variation control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”. Alternatively, the process for determining whether or not the probability variation control is to be terminated based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the probability variation control end is, for example, in step S231 illustrated in FIG. May be executed before determining (predetermining) whether or not to make the variable display result “big hit” in step S240.

  FIG. 42A is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 42 (A), the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the jackpot end time effect waiting time has elapsed (step S311). As an example, in the post-opening of the big prize opening in step S116 shown in FIG. 32, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit A value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S311, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value (for example, “0” or the like). Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed may be determined according to whether or not the game has been done. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S311 (step S311; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end stage waiting time has elapsed in step S311 (step S311; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (step S312). Subsequently, a setting for starting control of the gaming state according to the big hit type buffer read value that is the big hit type buffer value read in step S312 is performed (step S313). FIG. 42B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a setting example in step S313. As shown in FIG. 42 (B), when the big hit type buffer read value is “0”, the setting for starting the control to change the gaming state to the time reduction state is performed. At this time, for example, the CPU 56 sets the time reduction flag to the ON state, and sets a predetermined count initial value (for example, “100”) corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the time reduction state. Set to the counter. When the big hit type buffer read value is “1” or “2”, a setting for starting the control for changing the gaming state to the probable change state is performed. At this time, for example, the CPU 56 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to the on state.

  After the setting in step S313, the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S314), and then the big hit end processing is terminated.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process executed in step S16 of FIG. In this normal symbol process, the CPU 56 first checks whether the detection signal from the gate switch 32a provided in the gate 32 is in an on state, thereby detecting whether a game ball that has passed through the gate 32 has been detected. It is determined whether or not (step S131). When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the detection signal from the gate switch 32a is turned on (step S131; Yes), processing at the time of passing the gate is executed (step S132). On the other hand, when the detection signal from the gate switch 32a is in the off state (step S131; No), the process of step S132 is skipped.

  As an example of the process at the time of passing through the gate executed in step S132, the following process is executed. That is, first, whether or not the number of pending map storages, which is the number of pending data stored in the pending map storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 55, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). Determine whether. At this time, if the number of stored customary drawings is an upper limit value, the current game ball detection is invalidated and the process at the time of passing the gate is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the number of stored common charts is less than the upper limit value, for example, the CPU 56 determines the display of normal charts from numerical data updated by a random counter or the like provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR5 for use is extracted. Then, the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value MR5 is set as the hold data at the head of the empty entry in the usual hold storage unit. After the above-described processing at the time of passing the gate, or after it is determined in step S131 that the detection signal from the gate switch 13a is in the OFF state, the following processing is performed according to the value of the usual process flag. Each process of steps S140 to S144 is executed.

  The normal symbol normal process in step S140 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In this normal symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol game 10 is started by the normal symbol display 10 based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the normal symbol storage unit. At this time, for example, if there is pending data stored in the usual figure hold storage unit, the value of the usual figure process flag is updated to “1”.

  The normal symbol determination process in step S141 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “1”. In this normal symbol determination process, based on numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for determining the normal symbol display result, a normal symbol variable display result in the normal symbol game is referred to by referring to a prepared general symbol display result determination table. For example, a determination is made as to whether the result of the normal map display is “per normal map” or “missing the general map”. Here, in the general chart display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probable change state or a short-time state, the ratio that the base map display result is determined to be “per normal map” is higher than that in the normal state. In this way, a decision value to be compared with the random value MR5 is assigned to the usual map display result. As a result, in the probability variation state and the short time state, the base map display result is more likely to be “per base map” than in the normal state, so that the second start winning opening 14 formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in an expanded open state. This makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 14 (start winning prize).

  Further, in the normal symbol determination process, the universal symbol change time corresponding to the universal symbol display result is also determined. Here, in the common figure display result determination table, the normal figure change time is set to be shorter when the probability change state or the short time state is set than when the normal state is set. This reduces the interval for deriving and displaying the normal symbol variable display result in the normal game in the probability variation state and the short time state. The second start winning opening 14 formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15 is likely to be in an expanded and open state, and the game ball is likely to enter (start winning) the second start winning opening 14.

  Further, in the normal symbol determination process, even when the normal symbol display result is “per normal symbol”, even if the tilt control time consisting of the opening time and the number of times of opening the second start winning opening 14 is set to the expanded open state is set. Good. Here, in the normal map display result determination table, when the probability change state or the short time state is set, the opening time is set longer and the number of times of opening is larger than that in the normal state. As a result, in a special game state such as a probability change state or a short time state, the time for the second start winning opening 14 to be in the expanded open state becomes longer and the number of times of opening increases, so that the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14. (Starting prize) will be easier. The setting related to the tilt control may be performed in the normal symbol stop process in step S143 or the normal electric accessory operation process in step S144.

  The normal symbol variation process in step S142 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “2”. In this normal symbol variation process, a setting for varying the normal symbol in the regular symbol game by the normal symbol display 10 is performed. The normal symbol that changes based on these settings is displayed as a normal symbol display result that is a variable symbol display result of the normal symbol when the normal symbol stop process in step S143 is executed. In the normal symbol variation process, the elapsed time from the start of variation of the normal symbol is measured. At this time, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the normal time fluctuation time. Then, when the usual figure change time is reached, the value of the usual figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The normal symbol stop process in step S143 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “3”. In this normal symbol stop process, the normal symbol display 10 is set to stop and display the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol. Note that the setting for stopping and displaying the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is the value of the normal symbol process flag when the measured elapsed time reaches the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol variation process of step S142. It may be performed before updating to “3”. Further, in the normal symbol stop process, when the normal symbol display result is “per normal symbol”, for example, the solenoid 16 for the ordinary electric accessory connected to the movable wing piece included in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 15 is driven. After the setting for tilting control with the movable blade piece as the tilting position, such as the setting of the normal electric operation pattern, is performed, the value of the normal process flag is updated to “4”.

  In the case of setting the normal power operation pattern in the normal symbol stop process in step S143, the normal signal operation pattern is selected by selecting the normal power operation pattern corresponding to the general symbol display result determined in the normal symbol determination process in step S141. Different opening times and opening times may be set according to the display result. Alternatively, when the normal power operation pattern is set in step S142, it may be determined whether or not the time reduction flag is on, and the normal power operation pattern corresponding to the determination result may be set. In this case, when the normal symbol variable display is started, for example, the hourly flag is OFF corresponding to the big hit game state, etc., but when the normal symbol variable display result is stopped and displayed, the big hit game state Corresponding to the fact that the normal map display result was "per normal map" in the probability variation state or the short time state when the short time flag was turned on in response to the probability change state or the short time state after the end of The opening time and the number of opening times of the second start winning opening 14 can be set. As a result, for example, since the normal symbol variable display was started before the probability change state or the time-short state was entered, the second start prize will be received even if the normal diagram display result becomes “per normal figure” after the probability change state or the time-short state. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the mouth 14 with difficulty. If it is determined in the normal symbol stop process in step S143 that the usual figure display result is "ordinary figure loss", the ordinary figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to "0".

  The ordinary electric accessory actuating process of step S144 is executed when the value of the normal process flag is “4”. In this ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the movable wing piece provided in the ordinary variable winning ball device 15 is moved from the vertical position to the tilt position in response to the variable display result in the ordinary game being “per game”. Thus, setting of tilt control for changing the second start winning opening 14 from the normal open state to the expanded open state is performed. For example, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, a drive control signal for driving the solenoid 16 for the ordinary electric accessory is generated in accordance with the setting of the ordinary electric actuating pattern set in the ordinary symbol stopping process in step S143. Can be done. Further, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the elapsed time after the solenoid 16 for the ordinary electric accessory is driven and the second start winning opening 14 is in the expanded open state is measured. It is determined whether or not the corresponding tilt control time (open time) has been reached. When the elapsed time reaches the tilt control time, the driving of the solenoid 16 for the ordinary electric accessory is stopped, and the movable blade piece is returned from the tilt position to the vertical position, so that the second start winning opening 14 is changed. Set to change from the expanded open state to the normal open state. When the number of times of tilting the second start winning opening 14 in the expanded open state reaches the number of open times corresponding to the normal operation pattern, the normal process flag is cleared and the value is initialized to “0”. That's fine.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 80 will be described. In the effect control board 80, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 101 in the effect control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 44 is executed. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 44 is started, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S401), clears the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100, and sets various initial values. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) mounted on the effect control board 80 is performed.

  Thereafter, the effect random number update process is executed (step S402), and various random values used for effect control are counted by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 of the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100. The numerical data indicating the random value to be updated is updated by software. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S403). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting.

  On the side of the production control board 80, an interrupt for receiving the production control command from the main board 31 is generated separately from the timer interruption that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 31 is turned on. When an interruption occurs due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal, the effect control CPU 101 automatically sets the interrupt prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 101 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, for example, among the input ports 103 shown in FIG. 5, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 31 via the relay board 77. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 of the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is off in step S403 (step S403; No), the process returns to step S402. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on in step S403 (step S403; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S404), and command analysis processing is executed (step S405). . In the command analysis process executed in step S405, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S405, an effect control process is executed (step S406). In the effect control process, for example, an effect operation using various effect devices such as an effect image display operation on the display screen of the effect display device 9, an audio output operation from the speaker 27, and a lighting operation in the frame LED 28 and the decoration LED 25 is performed. With respect to the control content, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 31 are performed.

  In the command analysis process of step S405, for example, a start winning time command process as shown in FIG. 45 may be executed. In the start winning command processing, when the first start opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is specified with super reach. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is within the common range determined by the variation pattern. In the start winning time command process shown in FIG. 45, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a first start opening winning designation command has been received (step S501). The received effect control command is stored in the effect control command reception buffer, and the effect control CPU 120 reads the command stored in the effect control command reception buffer and confirms the contents, thereby receiving the received effect control command. A control command can be specified.

  If it is determined in step S501 that the first start opening winning designation command has been received (step S501; Yes), display update setting corresponding to the first starting opening winning is set (step S502). For example, in the process of step S502, the first by detecting a game ball that has entered one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H into the first start winning opening (start winning prize). Display setting for changing to blue display is performed according to the establishment of the start condition.

  When it is determined in step S501 that the first start opening winning designation command has not been received (step S501; No), it is determined whether or not the second starting opening winning designation command has been received (step S503). At this time, if the second start opening winning designation command is received (step S503; Yes), the display update corresponding to the second starting opening winning is set (step S504). For example, in the process of step S504, the second by detecting a game ball that has entered one of the display parts not displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H into the second start winning opening (start winning prize). Display setting for changing to red display is performed according to the establishment of the start condition. If the second start opening winning designation command has not been received (step S503; No), the start winning time command processing is terminated.

  After executing either of the processes of steps S502 and S504, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is determined by reading the EXT data in the first start opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command, for example. It is determined whether it is within the specific pattern common range (step S505).

  If it is within the range of the specific pattern common range in step S505 (step S505; Yes), the winning specific pattern flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is set to the on state (step S506). Further, after setting the total number of reserved storage after the start winning as the variation count value which is the stored value of the variation counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S507), the command processing at the start winning prize is performed. finish. If it is within the specific pattern common range in step S505, the winning special command flag is simply set to ON in step S506, and the start winning command processing is not performed without executing step S507. You may end.

  If it is outside the range of the specific pattern common range in step S505 (step S505; No), whether or not the special figure display result determined at the time of winning is a big hit by reading the EXT data in the winning display result notification command or the like. (Whether or not the EXT data is “01” to “03”) is determined (step S508). If the special figure display result determined at the time of winning the prize is a big hit (step S508; Yes), the process proceeds to step S506. If the special figure display result determined at the time of winning is not a big hit (step S508; No), the start winning command processing is ended. By doing so, it is possible to produce an effect that suggests that the variable display pattern becomes super reach and that the variable display result is a big hit. A command that can specify that the variable display pattern becomes super reach or that the variable display result is a big hit is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, so that the variable display pattern can be generated with one command. It may be possible to specify super reach and variable display results. Note that the process of step S508 is not executed, it is determined in step S505 whether the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the range of the specific pattern common range, and in step S506, the specific pattern common range is determined. Only when it is within the range, the winning specific pattern flag may be set to the ON state.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S406 of FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 46, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of the following processes in steps S160 to S166, for example, according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Select and execute.

  The decorative symbol variation start waiting process in step S160 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In the decorative symbol variation start waiting process, the effect display device 9 depends on whether one of the first variation start command and the second variation start command is received as the variation start command transmitted from the main board 31. Variable display of decorative symbols in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R provided on the display screen, the first attached symbol display 9a, or the second attached symbol display This includes a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of attached symbols in 9b. At this time, if it is determined that variable display is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this decorative symbol variation setting process, the start of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and the start of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. In order to perform various effects including variable display of decorative symbols and attached symbols, the final decorative symbols, temporary stop symbols, and pseudo Decide the pattern, presence / absence of notice effect, notice pattern, presence / absence of re-lottery effect, re-lottery effect pattern, presence / absence of promotion effect, etc. This includes a process of selecting and setting as a usage pattern. After such determination and setting are performed, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The decorative symbol variation process in step S162 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the decorative symbol variation processing, for example, various types of effect control patterns that are used patterns corresponding to the effect control process timer values that are stored in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 are used. The control data is read out, and various kinds of effect control during the variable display of the decorative design are performed. Then, in response to, for example, that the effect control process timer value has reached a predetermined variable display end value (for example, “0”) or that a decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received. A final decorative symbol as a final stop symbol that is a variable display result of the symbol is displayed in a completely stopped state. If the effect control process timer value is set to the variable display end value and the fixed decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped state, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. Sometimes, without depending on the effect control command from the main board 31, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the determined decorative pattern on the effect control board 80 side. When the finalized decorative symbol is displayed as a complete stop, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The decorative symbol variation end process in step S163 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. This decoration symbol variation end process includes a process of determining whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received. At this time, if it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received, if the variable display result specified from the hit start designation command is “big hit”, the value of the effect process flag is set to “4”. If the variable display result is “small hit”, the effect process flag value is updated to “5”. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the hit start designation command, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the variable display result being “lost”. Further, the decorative symbol variation end process includes a process for shifting from mode A or mode B to the mode N effect mode when the time-short state end timing is reached.

  The big hit control effect process in step S164 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the effect processing during the big hit control, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” or the like is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Or by outputting sound number data to the sound output board 70 and outputting sound and sound effects from the speaker 27, and turning on / off / flashing the light emitters such as the frame LED 28 and the decoration LED 25 by signal output to the lamp driver board 35. A process of controlling various performance operations in the big hit gaming state, such as making a game, is included. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 31. The effect processing during jackpot control includes a mode transition setting process for shifting the rendering mode according to the current rendering mode and the jackpot type.

  The effect process during small hit control in step S165 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In the effect processing during the small hit control, for example, various effect control patterns corresponding to the variable display result being “small hit” are set, and an effect image based on the set contents is displayed on the effect display device 9. Displaying on the screen, outputting sound and sound effects from the speaker 27 by outputting sound number data to the sound output board 70, turning on / off light emitters such as the frame LED 28 and the decoration LED 25 by outputting signals to the lamp driver board 35 Processing for controlling various effects in the small hit gaming state, such as turning off / flashing, is included. As an example, in the effect processing during small hit control in step S165, the various effect control patterns CST2-2 and CRE1-1 shown in FIG. 27 are selected as the effect control patterns to be sequentially used and read from the various effect control pattern tables 182. The production control process timer is set. Thereafter, various settings for controlling the rendering operation may be performed in accordance with the control data read from the rendering control pattern according to the rendering control process timer value. The effect operation executed by such setting may be an effect operation common to 2R big hit / small hit, which may be executed even when the big hit type is “2R probability change”. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The ending effect process in step S166 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this ending effect process, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 In addition, sound and sound effects are output from the speaker 27 by outputting sound number data to the sound output board 70, and light emitters such as the frame LED 28 and the decoration LED 25 are turned on / off / flashing by signal output to the lamp driver board 35. The process of controlling various performance operations corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state is included. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the end of the effect operation. At this time, for example, according to the transition example of the effect mode shown in FIG. 3, the effect mode corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state may be set.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation setting process executed in step S161 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the variable display result is “losing” by, for example, reading the EXT data of the variable display result notification command (step S531). . At this time, if the variable display result is “losing” (step S531; Yes), it is determined by determining whether or not the number of variable displays since the previous “15R uncertain change” has reached 100 times. Then, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the time saving state (step S532). It is to be noted that a short time state command indicating the start timing and end timing of the high base state (short time state or probability variation state) is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, and the short time state based on the command is transmitted. You may make it determine whether it is an end timing. In this case, the process of step S532 may be executed only when the current gaming state can be identified as the time saving state from the time saving state command. If it is the end timing of the short time state (step S532; Yes), the count value of the big hit continuation counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is reset to “0” (step S533). This big hit continuation counter is set to the high base state (short-time state or positive change state) in response to the variable display result “big hit” and the big hit type “15R uncertain change” or “15R positive change”. This is a counter for counting the number of times that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R non-probable change” or “15R positive change” before shifting to the low base state (normal state). Thus, 15R big hit in the high base state (probability change state or short time state) is also called continuous chain, and the number of continuous times is also called continuous channel number. The big hit continuation counter is added in the process of step S539 described later.

  After the process of step S533, or if it is not the end timing of the time reduction state in step 532 (step S532; No), for example, by reading the EXT data of the variation pattern designation command, the designated variation pattern is displayed as a decorative pattern. It is determined whether or not the non-reach variation pattern corresponds to the case where the variable display mode is “non-reach” (step S534).

  If it is determined in step S534 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S534; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S535). As an example, in the process of step S535, first, the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 16A is selected and set. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the decorative symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 16B is selected and set. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-2, the decorative symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B. At this time, based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, referring to the left / right output determination table 161 as shown in FIG. It is determined which of a plurality of types. Thereafter, the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 16C is selected and set. Subsequently, a random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, based on the extracted random number value SR1-3 and the left / right outcome type DC1-1, the final stop symbol determination table 160C is referred to determine a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  In this way, in the process of step S535, with reference to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination table 161, the decorative symbols to be the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1-3 are determined. Then, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols is either a reach combination or a jackpot combination, or any one of the pseudo consecutive chance eyes GC1 to GC8, one of the two chances of opening TC1 to TC4, or a predetermined as shown in FIG. A non-reach combination can be prevented.

  When it is determined in step S534 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S534; No), a combination of a definite decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting a reach-losing combination is determined (step S536). As an example, in the process of step S536, first, the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 19A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-1, the same decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 are displayed. decide. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 19B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162B based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-3, the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1, according to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, The symbol difference between the decorative symbol to be FZ2-2 and the decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined in this way, a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 is determined.

  In this way, in the process of step S536, first, the “left” and “right” symbols other than the “medium” symbol display area 9C in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the end using the final stop symbol determination table 162A. The decorative symbols to be the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the display areas 9L and 9R are determined. Thereafter, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the decorative symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 and the left and right final stop symbol FZ2-1 in the "medium" symbol display area 9C where the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed last. , The design difference with the decorative design to be FZ2-2 is determined, and the decorative design to be the middle final stop design FZ2-3 is determined according to the determined design difference.

  When the variable display result is other than “losing” in step S531 (step S531; No), the 15-round big hit in which the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R uncertain change” or “15R positive change”. It is determined whether or not (step S537). At this time, if it is determined that it is not a big hit for 15 rounds (step S537; No), the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R probability change”, or the variable display result is “ Corresponding to the case of “small hit”, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will result in the variable display of decorative symbols is determined (step S538). As an example, in response to the case where any one of the fluctuation patterns PC1-1, PC1-2, and PC1-3 is designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, the final stop that constitutes one of the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 The combination of the fixed decorative design that becomes the design is determined. In this case, the final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 20C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163C based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbol FZ4-1 that becomes one of the second opening chances TC1 to TC4, A combination of FZ4-2 and FZ4-3 is determined as a confirmed decorative symbol. Further, when any of the variation patterns PC1-4 and PC1-5 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, for example, by executing the same processing as step S536, the final stop symbol constituting the reach-losing combination is obtained. What is necessary is just to determine the combination of a fixed decoration design.

  If it is determined in step S537 that 15 rounds are a big hit (step S537; Yes), the count value of the big hit continuation counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is incremented by 1 (step S539). In addition, when the short time state command indicating the start and end timing of the high base state is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, the current gaming state is the high base state from the short time state command. The process of step S539 may be executed only when it can be specified. In this case, the first 15 round big hit in the normal state is not counted by the big hit continuation counter. Thereafter, a re-lottery effect setting process is executed (step S540).

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the re-lottery effect setting process executed in step S540. In the re-lottery effect setting process shown in FIG. 48, the effect control CPU 101 first sets the re-lottery effect execution determination table 164A shown in FIG. 21A (step S612).

  Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR4-1 for re-drawing effect execution determination is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S613). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-1, by referring to the re-lottery effect execution determination table 164A set in step S612, whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect It is determined whether promotion is successful or promotion failure when executing (step S614). If it is determined in step 614 not to execute the re-lottery effect (step S615; No), the process is finished as it is.

  If it is determined that the re-lottery effect is to be executed in step 614 (step S615; Yes), the temporary stop symbol before the re-lottery is determined as a decorative symbol to be displayed temporarily before executing the re-lottery effect (step S615). S616).

  As an example, in the process of step S616, first, the temporary stop symbol determination table 165 before re-lottery shown in FIG. 22 is selected as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number SR2 for determining a temporary stop symbol before re-lottery is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the pre-lottery temporary stop symbol determination table 165 based on the extracted numerical data indicating the random value SR2, the left, middle and right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, KZ7- which are usually the big hit combinations The combination of 3 is determined.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S616, for example, a re-lottery effect execution flag indicating execution of the re-lottery effect provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is set to the on state (step S617), and the re-lottery effect setting process is performed. Exit.

  When the re-lottery effect setting process in step S540 of FIG. 47 is finished, the promotion effect setting process is executed (step S541).

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the promotion effect setting process executed in step S541. In the promotion effect setting process shown in FIG. 49, the effect control CPU 101 first determines, for example, whether or not the re-lottery effect execution flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is in the ON state, thereby determining the re-lottery effect. Is determined (step S551).

  When it is determined in step S551 that the re-lottery effect is not executed (step S551; No), the count value of the big hit continuation counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is read (step S551A). Then, as a use table for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect, the jackpot promotion effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 21B in which different determination values are assigned according to the value of the jackpot continuation counter. 164B is selected and set (step S552). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR4-2 for determining the big hit middle promotion effect execution is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S553). Then, based on the numerical value data indicating the count value of the jackpot continuation counter and the extracted random number value SR4-2, the presence / absence of the jackpot promotion effect is determined by referring to the jackpot promotion promotion execution determination table 164B (step) S554).

  Following the processing of step S554, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S554 is to not execute the jackpot promotion effect (step S555). At this time, if the determination result indicates that the promotion effect is not executed (step S555; Yes), it is determined whether or not the big hit type is “15R uncertain change” (step S556). When the big hit type is “15R probability variation” and not “15R non-probability variation” (step S556; No), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the probability variation jackpot combination is determined (step S556). S557). As an example, in the process of step S557, the final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 20B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163B on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which become one of the probable big hit combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  In step S555, if it is the determination result of executing the promotion effect (step S555; No), the probability variation notification determination table 164C shown in FIG. 21C to which different determination values are assigned according to the value of the big hit continuation counter is displayed. Set (step S558). Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random value SR5-1 for determining probability change notification is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S559). Then, based on the count value of the big hit continuation counter and the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR5-1, whether or not to notify the probability change big hit by the jackpot promotion effect by referring to the probability change notification determination table 164C It is determined whether or not (step S560).

  Here, it is determined whether or not to notify that the jackpot type is a jackpot big jackpot promotion effect regardless of whether the jackpot type is “15R probability variation” or “15R non-probability variation”. However, in consideration of whether the big hit type is “15R probability variation” or “15R non-probability variation”, it may be determined whether or not to notify the probability variation big hit by the promotion effect during the big hit. For example, when the jackpot type is “15R probability change”, the determination value is assigned to the determination result that the probability change notification is executed and the determination result that the probability change notification is not executed, while the jackpot type is “15R”. In the case of “non-probability change”, the process of step S560 may be performed using a probability change notification determination table in which a determination value is assigned only to a determination result indicating that probability change notification is not executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, after determining whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect in the processing of steps S552 to S554, when executing the jackpot promotion effect, the probability change notification is executed in the processing of steps S558 to S560. Although it has been determined whether or not to perform, the process of determining whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect may be omitted. Specifically, for example, when it is determined No in step S551, it is determined whether the big hit type is “15R probability change” or “15R non-change probability”. If the jackpot type is “15R uncertain change”, the process proceeds to step S556 on the assumption that the jackpot promotion effect is not executed. On the other hand, if the big hit type is “15R probability change”, the process proceeds to step S558, where it is determined whether or not probability change notification is executed, and when the probability change notification is executed, the promotion effect during jackpot is executed. You can do it. In this case, if the jackpot type is “15R non-probable change” or if it is determined not to execute the probable change notification in step S560, the jackpot promotion effect itself may not be executed. Alternatively, the promotion failure production during the big hit may be executed. You may make it determine which becomes this. Furthermore, the ratio of which one is obtained may be varied according to the count value of the big hit continuation counter.

  After that, the jackpot type shown in FIG. 21 (D) in which different judgment values are assigned according to the jackpot type, the result of determining whether or not to notify that the jackpot is a promising big hit in step S560, and the value of the probable big jackpot continuation counter. The promotion effect pattern determination table 164D is set (step S561). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR5-2 for determining the big hit middle promotion effect pattern is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S562). Then, based on the jackpot type, the determination result of whether or not to notify that it is a probable variation jackpot in step S560, the count value of the jackpot continuation counter, and the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR5-1, By referring to the pattern determination table 164D, the jackpot promotion effect pattern is determined (step S563).

  After the process of step S564 or when the big hit type is “15R non-probable change” in step S556 (step S556; Yes), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the normal big hit combination is determined. (Step S564). As an example, in the process of step S564, the final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 20A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which are any of the normal jackpot combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern. Thus, if it is determined in step S555 that the jackpot promotion effect is executed, based on the determination result in step S564, the final stop symbol constituting the normal jackpot combination is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the decorative symbol, The derivation display of the final stop symbol that constitutes the probable big hit combination is prevented. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player or the like from feeling uncomfortable because the promotion effect during the big hit is executed even though the final stop symbol constituting the probability variation big hit combination is derived and displayed.

  If it is determined in step S551 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed (step S551; Yes), the re-lottery effect execution flag is cleared to an off state (step S565), and the re-lottery is performed in the process of step S614 in FIG. It is determined whether or not the promotion is determined to be successful in the performance (step S566). If it is determined in step S566 that the promotion has been determined to be successful (step S566; Yes), a combination of confirmed decorative symbols that is a final stop symbol constituting the probability variation jackpot combination is determined (step S557). If it is determined in step S566 that promotion has failed (step S566; No), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is a final stop symbol constituting the normal jackpot combination is determined (step S564). In this embodiment, when the re-lottery effect is executed, the promotion effect during the big hit is not executed, but when it is determined that the promotion is failed in the re-lottery effect (step S566; No), you may make it move to step S551A and make a jackpot promotion effect at a predetermined rate.

  In this embodiment, when the re-lottery effect is executed, the process (steps S553 to S555) for determining whether or not the promotion effect is executed (during the big hit) is not executed. In other words, the promotion effect is not executed regardless of whether or not the decorative pattern to be finally stopped is a probability variation jackpot combination. In addition, when the decorative pattern to be finally stopped is a normal jackpot combination, the promotion effect may be executed. When it is determined No in step S556, that is, when neither the re-lottering effect nor the jackpot promotion effect is executed, and the jackpot type is “15R probability variation”, the process proceeds to step S564 at a predetermined rate. In this way, the final stop symbol of the normal jackpot combination is determined. For example, a predetermined random number value may be extracted, and it may be determined whether or not to determine the final stop symbol of the normal jackpot combination based on the random number value. In this case, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the common effect mode is controlled.

  After performing any of the processes of steps S535, S536, S538, and S541 in FIG. 47, a variable display effect setting process is performed (step S542). FIG. 50A is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display effect setting process executed in step S542. In the variable display effect setting process shown in FIG. 50A, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a change pattern (for example, a variable pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command) to execute a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect (for example, It is determined whether or not it is a variation pattern PA1-4, variation pattern PB2-1, PB2-2, variation pattern PB4-1, or the like (step S601). If it is determined that the variation pattern is to execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect (step S601; Yes), the pseudo-continuous temporary stop is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. A temporary stop symbol at the chance stop when the temporary stop display is performed with the symbol is determined (step S602).

  As an example, in the process of step S602, first, the number of executions of pseudo continuous variation in the variation pattern indicated in the received variation pattern designation command is set to a constant M. In other words, when the number of executions (not including the initial fluctuation) of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous” is a single fluctuation pattern, the constant M is set to “1”, and the pseudo The constant M is set to “2” when the number of executions of the continuous variation is a variation pattern of two times, and the constant M is set to “3” when the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation is a variation pattern of three. Set. Subsequently, “0” is set to a variable N indicating the number of combinations of temporarily stopped symbols that have been determined. When the variation pattern PA1-4 is specified, the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination table 166A shown in FIG. 23A is selected as a use table, and when a variation pattern other than these is specified. The pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166B shown in FIG. 23B is selected as a use table. Thereafter, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR3-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR3-1, by referring to any of the selected pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A, 166B, the left that becomes one of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 The combination of the middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 is determined. At this time, the variable N is updated by adding 1, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M, the determination of the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is finished. On the other hand, if the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the effect control CPU 101 selects the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination table 166C shown in FIG. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR3-2 for determining the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166C based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR3-2, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ3 that becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chance eyes GC1 to GC8. -1, KZ3-2 and KZ3-3 are determined. At this time, the variable N is updated by adding 1, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M, the determination of the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is finished. On the other hand, if the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the effect control CPU 101 selects the quasi-continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166D shown in FIG. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a random number SR3-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR3-3, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ4 that becomes one of the pseudo continuous chance eyes GC1 to GC8. -1, KZ4-2, and KZ4-3 are determined. At this time, by updating the variable N by adding 1, the updated variable N matches the constant M, and thus the determination of the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol is finished.

  When it is determined in step S601 that the variation pattern does not execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect (step S601; No), or after performing one of the processes in steps S602 and S604, the notice effect A setting process (step S603) is executed.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the notice effect setting process executed in step S603 of FIG. In the notice effect setting processing shown in FIG. 51, the effect control CPU 101 first selects and sets the notice pattern type determination table 169 shown in FIG. 25 as a use table for determining the notice effect pattern type of the notice effect. (Step S641). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value SR6-1 for determining the notice pattern type is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S642). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR6-1, the presence / absence of the notice effect and the notice pattern type are determined by referring to the notice pattern type determination table 169 (step S643). At this time, for example, the presence / absence of the notice effect is determined at a different determination ratio depending on whether the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command is “losing”, “small hit”, or “big hit”. .

  Following the processing of step S643, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S643 is to execute a notice effect (step S644). At this time, if it is a determination result for executing the notice effect (step S644; Yes), for example, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified from the stored contents of the gaming state buffer (step S645). In addition, as a use table for determining any one of a plurality of types of notice patterns, the notice pattern types determined in step S643 among the notice pattern determination tables 170A to 170F shown in FIGS. One of the corresponding ones is selected and set according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. 26G (step S646). Furthermore, the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command is specified (step S647). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value SR6-2 for determining the notice pattern is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S648). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR6-2, the notice pattern is designated as notice X1, X2, notice Y1, Y2 by referring to any of the notice pattern determination tables 170A to 170F set in step S646. Then, any one of the notices Z1 and Z2 is determined (step S649).

  If it is a determination result that the notice effect is not executed in step S644 (step S644; No), or after the notice pattern is determined in step S649, for example, the stored value of the previous notice storage buffer is associated with each decision result. The previous notice memory is updated by setting the value to the previous value (step S650), and the notice effect setting process is terminated.

  When the notice effect setting process ends in this way, for example, it is determined whether or not the winning specific pattern flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is in an ON state (step S604). If the winning specific pattern flag is in the OFF state (step S604; No), the variable display effect setting process is terminated. When the winning specific pattern flag is in the on state (step S604; Yes), at the time of winning for notifying that the decorative pattern variation pattern is a variation pattern with at least super reach, or that the display result is “big hit” Settings for executing the specific pattern notification effect (notification effect setting process) are performed (step S605). The winning specific pattern notification effect may be an effect that uses the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, a decorative lamp, or the like to notify that the variable display mode is super reach or that the display result is “big hit”. That's fine.

  In this embodiment, as a specific pattern notification effect at the time of winning a prize, a continuous notice effect for displaying a character image or the like on the effect display device 9 is performed over a plurality of variable displays before actually reaching a super reach or “big hit”. Is done. FIG. 50B is a flowchart illustrating an example of the notification effect setting process. In the notification effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 sets the continuous notice flag indicating execution of the continuous notice to the on state (step S607). Note that the specific pattern notification effect at the time of winning may be executed at different ratios based on whether the variable display mode is super reach or the display result is “big hit”.

  Further, in step S506 of FIG. 45, the winning specific pattern flag may be set at a predetermined rate, and the winning specific pattern notification effect may be executed at a predetermined rate. Also, the winning specific pattern notification effect execution ratio is set so that the winning specific pattern flag is set at a different rate between the case where it is determined Yes in step S505 and the case where it is determined Yes in step S508. It may be different.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S607, the current total number of reserved memories is set in the continuous notice counter for specifying the number of executions of the continuous notice provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S608). Here, the continuous notice is executed over the variable display of the number of times corresponding to the value set in the continuous notice counter. When the notification effect setting process is finished, the winning specific pattern flag is cleared to the off state (step S606), and the variable display effect setting process is ended.

  After performing the variable display effect setting process in step S542 shown in FIG. 47, a plurality of effect control patterns are determined in advance (step S543). At this time, the production control CPU 101 selects one of a plurality of symbol variation control patterns stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 185, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, and the usage pattern. Set as. Further, in response to the re-lottery effect pattern determined in step S618 shown in FIG. 48, one of a plurality of stored effect control patterns such as various effect pattern tables is selected and set as a use pattern. Further, in response to the notice pattern determined in step S649 shown in FIG. 51, one of a plurality of notice effect control patterns stored in the notice effect control pattern table 186 is selected and set as a use pattern.

  Subsequent to the process of step S543, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command (step S544). And the setting for starting the fluctuation | variation of the decoration symbol in the production | presentation display apparatus 9 is performed (step S545). At this time, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the symbol variation control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S543 is transmitted to the VDP 109, and the like is provided on the display screen of the effect display device 9. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the process during the decorative symbol variation (step S546), and the decorative symbol variation setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation process executed in step S162 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation process shown in FIG. 52, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the continuous notice flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S570A). If the continuous notice flag is on (step S570A; Yes), a setting for executing the continuous notice corresponding to the value of the continuous notice counter is made (step S570B). The continuous notice may be any notice that displays a relevant image or character in a plurality of variable displays, thereby giving a notice of becoming a super reach or a “hit” in the subsequent variable display. In addition to using the effect display device 9, an effect using an effect device such as the speaker 27 or a decorative lamp may be used in a plurality of variable displays. In that case, what is necessary is just to make it produce a different aspect according to the value of a continuous notice counter. In step S570A, for example, an effect control pattern for continuous notice corresponding to the value of the continuous notice counter is set. At this time, the continuous notice counter is decremented by 1 (step S570C). When the continuous notice flag is in the off state (step S570A; No), after step S570C, for example, after updating the presentation control process timer value (for example, 1 subtraction) (step S571), the updated presentation control process The timer value is compared with an effect control process timer determination value indicated by the effect control pattern, and it is determined whether or not it matches any timer determination value (step S572). And if it does not correspond to any timer determination value (step S572; No), the decorative symbol changing process is terminated.

  If the timer determination value matches with the timer determination value in step S572 (step S572; Yes), the effect control execution data (for example, display control data, audio control data, and the like) stored in the effect control pattern in association with the timer determination value. The lamp control data, a part or all of the movable member control data) or an end code is read (step S573). Here, when the plurality of timer determination values indicated by the effect control pattern in step S572 match the effect control process timer value, the plurality of stored timer determination values are associated with each other and stored. The effect control execution data may be read out in the process of step S573. Then, it is determined whether or not the end code has been read in step S573 (step S574). At this time, if it is determined that the code is not an end code (step S574; No), control of the rendering operation according to the rendering control execution data read out in step S573 is executed (step S575), and then the decorative design is performed. The process during change is terminated. For example, in the process of step S575, the display control command specified by the display control data is transmitted to the VDP 109, the command corresponding to the audio data specified by the audio control data is transmitted to the audio output board 70, A part or all of the signal output specified by the lamp control data to the lamp driver board 35 and the motor drive signal specified by the movable member data to the motor 86 are sequentially or in parallel. (If there is only one operation, it may be performed alone). In the process of step S575, for example, operation detection control data included in a predetermined effect control pattern such as the notice effect control pattern CYZ determined in step S543 shown in FIG. Based on this, effect control related to the player's operation on the operation unit 38 may be executed. More specifically, it is determined from the operation detection control data, the effect control process timer value, or the like whether or not it is an operation effective period for effectively detecting an operation on the operation unit 38. At this time, if the operation is valid, it is determined whether or not the player's operation on the operation unit 38 is detected based on the detection signal transmitted from the operation detection switch 38a. When an operation is detected, in order to execute an effect operation corresponding to the operation mode or the like, display control data or the like is read out from the effect control pattern, or various control boards and effect devices are used. For example, a control command or the like may be transmitted. Further, when an operation on the operation unit 38 is detected during the operation effective period, the operation effective period may be terminated to invalidate the operation on the operation unit 38, and the operation on the operation unit 38 may be detected effectively. Thus, a further effect operation corresponding to the detected operation may be executed. Thus, based on the operation detection control data included in the effect control pattern, in the process of step S575, depending on whether or not an operation on the operation unit 38 is detected, control for executing a predetermined effect operation and control for not executing it. Any one of the above may be performed.

  If it is determined in step S574 that it is an end code (step S574; Yes), for example, by setting a predetermined timer initial value in the effect control process timer, the hit start designation command reception waiting time is set. This is performed (step S576). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” that is a value corresponding to the process at the end of the decorative symbol variation (step S577), and then the process during the decorative symbol variation is terminated. When a decorative symbol stop command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, when it is determined in step S574 that the code is an end code, “left”, “middle”, “right” In the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, for example, a temporary stop display is performed so as to display the fluctuation variation of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol stop command is received in the decorative symbol variation end process of step S163 shown in FIG. In response to this, the decorative design may be completely stopped (final stop).

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation end process executed in step S163 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation end process shown in FIG. 53, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed (step S581). Here, the hit start designation command reception waiting time is the time set in the process of step S576 shown in FIG. If the hit start designation command reception waiting time has not elapsed in step S581 (step S581; No), it is determined whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received (step S582). . At this time, if no hit start designation command is received (step S582; No), the decorative symbol variation end process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S582 that a hit start designation command has been received (step S582; Yes), the start of the big hit gaming state among the various effect control patterns stored in the various effect control pattern table 182 Is selected from among various effect control patterns CST1-1, various effect control patterns CST1-2, and various effect control patterns CST2-1 prepared for informing the user (step S583). At this time, for example, based on the jackpot type specified from the variable display result notification command, the determination result of the presence / absence of jackpot promotion effect in the processing of steps S539 and S540 shown in FIG. 47, various effect control patterns CST1-1, It is only necessary to determine which of the effect control pattern CST1-2 and the various effect control patterns CST2-1 is to be used.

  Thereafter, for example, effect control execution data included in various effect control patterns selected in step S583 is read (step S584). Subsequently, the hit notification operation is controlled according to the effect control execution data read in step S584 (step S585). For example, in the process of step S585, the display control command specified by the display control data is transmitted to the VDP 109, the command corresponding to the audio data specified by the audio control data is transmitted to the audio output board 70, A part or all of the signal output specified by the lamp control data to the lamp driver board 35 and the motor drive signal specified by the movable member data to the motor 86 are sequentially or in parallel. (If there is only one operation, it may be performed alone). Thereby, the display of the effect image on the display screen of the effect display device 9, the output operation of the sound and sound effect from the speaker 27, the lighting operation of the light emitters such as the frame LED 28 and the decoration LED 25, the moving operation of the movable member 78, etc. The variable display result becomes “big hit” or “small win”, and it can be notified that the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  Subsequent to the process of step S585, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during the big hit control (step S587).

  In addition, when it is determined in step S581 that the hit waiting time for receiving the designated start command has elapsed (step S581; Yes), the current effect is confirmed by checking the mode flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. A mode is specified (step S588). Then, it is determined whether or not the specified effect mode is mode N (step S589). If the current production mode is not mode N (step S589; No), it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the short-time state (step S590). If it is the end timing of the short time state (step S590; Yes), a setting for shifting to the production mode to the mode N is performed (step S591). For example, in step S591, the value of the mode flag is set to a value corresponding to mode N, and a plurality of mode transition effect control patterns MCN stored in the mode transition effect control pattern table 181 are selected, and the usage pattern at the time of mode transition effect is selected. Set as. After finishing the process of step S591, or when the mode is N in step S589 (step S589; Yes), the effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S592). .

  After the process of step S587 or S592, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice counter is 0 (step S593). Here, it is determined whether or not a series of continuous notices have ended. If the value of the continuous notice counter is 0 (step S593; Yes), in order to end the execution of the continuous notice, the continuous notice flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is cleared to an off state (step S594). The process at the end of the decorative symbol variation ends. If the value of the continuous notice counter is not 0 (step S593; No), the decorative symbol variation end process is terminated as it is.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit control effect processing executed in step S164 of FIG. In the effect processing during the big hit control, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received (step S701). At this time, if a hit end designation command is received (step S701; Yes), a setting for ending the big hit effect that is performed corresponding to the big hit game state is made (step S702), and the value of the production process flag is set. After updating to “6” corresponding to the ending effect process (step S703), the mode transition setting process is executed (step S703A). End processing during the big hit control.

  If no hit end designation command is received in step S701 (step S701; No), it is determined whether or not a promotion effect flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S704). . Here, the promotion effect in-progress flag is set to an on state by executing a process in step S712, which will be described later, while being cleared and in an off state by executing the process in step S716. In addition, when the process of step S702 is executed, the flag indicating that the promotion effect is being performed may be cleared to be in an off state.

  When the promotion effect flag is off in step S704 (step S704; No), for example, depending on whether or not the effect control process timer value matches a predetermined effect start determination value, the jackpot promotion effect It is determined whether or not the execution timing has come (step S705). Here, in the big hit state of 2 rounds, since the execution period of each round is short, the effect control process timer value may be set so as not to reach the effect start determination value.

  When it is determined in step S705 that it is the execution timing of the jackpot promotion effect (step S705; Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot promotion effect is executed (step S709). In step S709, for example, in the process of step S554 of FIG. 49, when it is determined that the promotion effect is to be executed, the promotion effect execution flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is set to the on state, Whether the promotion effect execution flag is set to the off state when it is determined that the promotion effect is not executed, and whether the promotion effect during the big hit is executed depending on whether the promotion effect execution flag is on or not May be determined. When it is determined not to execute the jackpot promotion effect (step S709; Yes), the setting for executing the effect operation that becomes the jackpot effect according to the number of rounds that is the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state is performed. This is performed (step S710). As an example, in the processing of step S710, the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state is specified from the big win opening open designation command for 15 rounds big hit or 2 round big hit / small hit transmitted from the main board 31. When the number of rounds is updated, the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated number of rounds is read from the various effect control pattern tables 182 and the effect control process timer is set. After that, in accordance with the control data read from the effect control pattern in accordance with the effect control process timer value, an effect operation that is a big hit effect is executed. After executing the processing in step S710, the big hit control effect processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S709 to execute the jackpot promotion effect (step S709; No), settings for starting the jackpot promotion effect are performed (step S711). As an example, in the process of step S711, the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state is specified from the big win opening opening designation command for 15 round big hits transmitted from the main board 31. Then, an effect control pattern for executing the promotion effect corresponding to the specified number of rounds is read from the various effect control pattern tables 182 and an effect control process timer is set. At this time, for example, the value of the notification content buffer (notification content buffer value) provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is set according to which of the big success promotion effect and the big success failure promotion effect is executed. It may be. As a specific example, the notification content buffer value is set to “1” when executing the jackpot promotion promotion success effect, while the notification content buffer value is set to “0” when executing the jackpot promotion promotion effect. Set to. Then, after setting the promotion effect in-progress flag to an on state (step S712), the big hit control effect processing is terminated.

  Then, if it is determined in step S704 that the flag during the promotion effect is on (step S704; Yes), for example, does the effect control process timer value match the effect end determination value indicated in the effect control pattern? It is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the jackpot promotion effect depending on whether or not (step S713). At this time, if it is not the end timing of the jackpot promotion effect (step S713; No), settings are made to control the rendering operation that becomes the jackpot promotion effect (step S714). After the process of step S714 is executed, the big hit control effect process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S713 that it is the end timing of the jackpot promotion effect (step S713; Yes), a setting for ending the jackpot promotion effect is made (step S715), and the flag during the promotion effect is cleared. Then, after the off state is set (step S716), the big hit control effect processing is terminated.

  FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing an example of the mode transition setting process executed in step S703A of FIG. In this mode transition setting process, the production control CPU 101 first identifies the current production mode by checking a mode flag provided in the production control flag setting unit 191 (step S721), and in the current variation. The final stop symbol (stop symbol at the end of the variable display time) and the success / failure of promotion in the jackpot promotion effect (for example, the determination result of step S560) are specified (step S722). And the mode shown in FIG. 55 (B) based on the identified current presentation mode and the success / failure of promotion in the final stop symbol and jackpot promotion promotion (whether or not to execute the probability change notification in the jackpot promotion promotion). An effect mode to be transferred is determined according to the transfer setting (step S723). The mode transition setting shown in FIG. 55 (B) corresponds to the mode transition example shown in FIG. In step S723, the mode flag value is set to a value corresponding to the effect mode after the transition, and one of the mode transition effect control patterns stored in the mode transition effect control pattern table 181 is selected, and the mode transition effect is selected. Set as the usage pattern for the hour. Thereafter, the mode transition setting process ends.

  In this embodiment, in the mode transition setting process shown in FIG. 55A and the process of S588 to S591 in FIG. 53, the effect mode switching process is executed. It may be executed in other processing until the end of the variable display of the decorative design or the end of the big hit gaming state, such as the decorative design variation setting processing in step S161.

  Next, specific examples of various effects performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. FIG. 56 shows an example of the background in each effect mode. FIG. 56A shows the background in mode N. In mode N (normal mode), no image is displayed on the background as shown in FIG. FIG. 56B shows the background in mode A. In mode A, an image of the sea is displayed as shown in FIG. FIG. 56C shows the background in mode B. In mode B, a mountain image is displayed as shown in FIG. FIG. 56D shows the background in mode C. In mode C, a space image is displayed as shown in FIG. Thus, each effect mode is distinguished by the background image. In addition, each effect mode may be distinguished by displaying a character image corresponding to each effect mode. In the production modes of mode A, mode B, and mode C, for example, the battle mode in which the battle production in which the ally character fights against the enemy character is continuously executed over a plurality of variable displays can be set to the mode N. Differentiated.

  57 and 58 show specific examples of the display operation and the like in the effect display device 9 when the jackpot promotion effect is executed. When the effect control CPU 101 determines in step S554 in FIG. 49 to execute the jackpot promotion effect, “left” and “middle” provided on the display screen of the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. In the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R on the “right”, after the final stop symbol “666”, which is a normal jackpot combination, is stopped and displayed, during the jackpot gaming state, the effect is as shown in FIG. 57 (B). An image of the character CH1 indicating that the jackpot promotion effect is started is displayed on the display screen of the display device 9. At this time, in the symbol display area 9S of the effect display device 9, by displaying the symbol number that has become the final stop symbol, the player can confirm whether or not the final stop symbol is a normal jackpot combination. During the round game, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), the jackpot promotion effect in which the character CH1 and the character CH2 fight is executed, and in response to the decision to execute the probability change notification in step S560, FIG. As shown in (D), the effect that the character CH1 wins over the character CH2 is executed, and as shown in FIG. After that, when the big hit gaming state is finished, for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (F), a letter indicating that the big hit is finished is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 57 (G), a letter indicating that the game is in the probable change state is displayed. , Controlled to the probability variation state. Note that the jackpot promotion effect using the character CH1 as shown in FIGS. 57B to 57D corresponds to the promotion effect pattern A in the jackpot promotion effect determination table 164D of FIG. 21D.

  Similarly, when the effect control CPU 101 determines to execute the jackpot promotion effect in step S554 of FIG. 49, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), “left” provided on the display screen of the effect display device 9, In the symbol display area 9L, 9C, 9R of “middle” and “right”, after the final stop symbol “666” which is a normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, in the jackpot gaming state, it is shown in FIG. Thus, the image of the character CH3 indicating that the jackpot promotion effect is started is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. During the round game, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), the jackpot promotion effect in which the character CH3 and the character CH2 fight is executed, and in response to the determination that the probability change notification is not executed in step S560, FIG. As shown in (D), the effect that the character CH3 is defeated by the character CH2 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 58 (E), the fact that the promotion is failed is displayed and it is not notified whether or not the state is shifted to the probability change state. . After that, when the big hit gaming state is finished, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (F), a letter indicating that the big hit is finished is displayed, and the probability change state or the short time state is controlled, and the probability change state or the short time state is set. The mode is switched to the mode A or the mode B in which it cannot be specified. Note that the jackpot promotion effect in which the character CH1 as shown in FIGS. 58B to 58D is used corresponds to the promotion effect pattern B in the jackpot promotion effect determination table 164D of FIG. 21D.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the setting of the big hit middle promotion effect execution determination table 164B shown in FIG. 21B, the big hit middle promotion effect is less likely to be executed as the count value of the big hit continuation number counter is larger. ing. In the setting of the probability variation notification determination table 164C shown in FIG. 21C, the probability variation notification is more easily performed as the count value of the big hit continuation number counter is larger. Further, in the setting of the big hit middle promotion effect pattern determination table 164D shown in FIG. 21D, the higher the count value of the big hit continuation number counter, the easier it is to be determined as the promotion effect pattern B. Thus, depending on the number of times of 15R big hit in the high base state (probability change state or short time state), the execution ratio of the jackpot promotion effect, the rate of successful promotion, and the determination rate of the jackpot promotion effect pattern are different. Since the range of production is widened, the interest of the game is improved.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R probability variation”, and the decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is derived and displayed by the re-lottery effect (in the case of 15R probability variation (latency)) or by the jackpot medium promotion effect When it is not informed that the transition to the probability change state is performed due to the execution of the big hit promotion promotion effect, or when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R non-probable”, the big hit game After the end of the state, the mode shifts to an effect mode in which it is not possible to specify whether or not the state is controlled to a certain variation state such as mode A. By providing such a production mode (common production mode), the range of production is widened and the interest of the game is improved.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 3, the mode B effect mode in the common effect mode is not directly shifted from the mode N effect mode. By doing so, the range of production is widened and the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes the processing of steps S351 to S356 shown in FIG. 35, etc., determines the special figure display result, and determines the variation pattern type included in the hold data of the special figure game. Whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 falls within the specific pattern common range is determined before the start of the special figure game based on the hold data. Then, on the side of the effect control board 80, depending on whether or not the effect control CPU 101 has set the winning specific pattern flag to the on state in step S506 of FIG. 45, step S604 of FIG. By executing the process of S605, it is determined whether or not to execute the winning specific pattern notification effect. Thus, it becomes possible to notify that the super reach is reached before the variable display with the specific variation pattern accompanied by the super reach is executed, and that the special figure display result is the “big hit”. In addition, since the variation patterns other than the specific variation pattern can be easily determined as a variation pattern having a short variation time when the number of pending data is large, the frequency of execution of variable display can be increased.

  The CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 uses any one of the variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 12, for example, in the process of step S270 shown in FIG. decide. Thereafter, based on the determination result of the variation pattern type, in the process of step S272 illustrated in FIG. 39, for example, one of the variation patterns determination table illustrated in FIG. . Thereby, when adding the variation pattern type or changing the occurrence rate, it is only necessary to change the setting of the determined value in the variation pattern type determination table, so that the setting time can be shortened. In addition, when adding a detailed variation pattern or changing the occurrence rate, it is only necessary to change the setting of the determination value in the variation pattern determination table, so that the setting time can be shortened. That is, since the determination ratio of the variation pattern type and the determination ratio of the variation pattern can be set separately, the design change related to the variation pattern type and the distribution of the variation pattern can be easily performed.

  In the process of step S643 shown in FIG. 51, the effect control CPU 101 determines, for example, one of a plurality of advance notice pattern types prepared in advance using the advance notice pattern type determination table 169 shown in FIG. Thereafter, based on the determination result of the notice pattern type, in the process of step S649 shown in FIG. 51, for example, any of the notice pattern determination tables 170A to 170F shown in FIGS. Are determined in advance. Thereby, when adding the notice pattern type or changing the occurrence rate, it is only necessary to change the setting of the determination value in the notice pattern type determination table, so that the setting time can be shortened. Further, when adding a detailed notice pattern or changing the occurrence rate, it is only necessary to change the setting of the decision value in the notice pattern determination table, so that the setting time can be shortened. That is, since the determination ratio of the notice pattern type and the decision ratio of the notice pattern can be set separately, the design change relating to the distribution of the notice pattern type and the notice pattern can be easily performed.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. In the above embodiment, it is determined on the side of the production control board 80 whether or not it is time to end the time reduction state by the process of step S532 in FIG. 47, and if it is time to end, it is a big hit in the process of step S533 The continuation counter value is reset, and in response to the variable display result being 15 rounds of big hit, the big hit in the high base state (time-short state or probability change state) is added by adding the big hit continuation counter value in the process of step S539. The number of continuations (number of consecutive chunks) was counted. The method of counting the number of continuations of jackpot in the high base state is not limited to this, and when the round hits 15 rounds during the high base state, the round hits 15 rounds during the high base state from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. It is also possible to transmit the command that can specify that it has become and count the number of times the command is transmitted on the effect control board 80 side, thereby counting the number of consecutive big hits in the high base state. In this case, when the high base state is finished, a command capable of specifying the fact is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, and the count value is reset when the command is transmitted on the effect control board 80 side. What should I do?

  In the above embodiment, whether or not the execution control CPU 101 executes the probability change notification by referring to the probability change notification determination table 164C shown in FIG. 21C in the processing of steps S558 to S560 in FIG. After determining, in the process of steps S561 to S563, referring to the big hit middle promotion effect pattern determination table 164D shown in FIG. 21D, the big hit middle promotion corresponding to whether or not to execute the probability change notification. The production pattern was decided. For example, when the jackpot type is “15R probability change” as shown in FIG. 59, the “promotion success” jackpot promotion effect pattern for executing the probability change notification and the probability change notification are not executed. A jackpot / medium promotion effect pattern determination table 164E in which a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR5-2 for determining the jackpot / medium promotion effect pattern is assigned to each of the jackpot / medium promotion effect patterns of “promotion failure” is used. Thus, the presence / absence of the probability change notification and the jackpot promotion effect pattern may be determined simultaneously. In this case, the processing in steps S558 to S560 in FIG. 49 is omitted.

  In the above embodiment, the number of continuations of jackpot during the high base state (until the high base state ends) is counted, and the execution ratio of the jackpot promotion effect and the determination ratio of the jackpot promotion pattern are determined by the count value. The success rate of promotion was different, but the number of continuations of jackpot during the probability change state (until the probability change state ends) is counted, and the execution ratio of the jackpot promotion effect and the determination pattern of the jackpot promotion effect are determined by the count value You may make it vary the rate and the success rate of promotion. Further, during the high base state, the execution ratio of the big hit middle promotion effect may be set to zero so that the big hit middle promotion effect is not executed. Similarly, the promotion may not be successful even when the promotion effect during the big hit is executed. Further, the re-lottery effect may not be executed during the high base state.

  In the above embodiment, for example, the number of consecutive big hits for 15 rounds from the high base state to the low base state after the end of the big hit gaming state is counted by the big hit continuation counter. However, by counting the number of continuations per 15 rounds during a predetermined period other than this, the execution ratio of the jackpot promotion effect, the determination ratio of the jackpot promotion effect pattern, the promotion You may make it vary the rate of success. The predetermined period includes, for example, a period from power-on to power-off of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a period from power-on to a specific number of variable display executions, from power-on to a specific 15 round big hit. The period, the period from the end of the big hit gaming state to the normal change state until the normal change state, the period until the specific number of variable display is executed after the round 15 big hit, etc. are predetermined. The period is arbitrary.

  In the above embodiment, the presence / absence of execution of the jackpot promotion effect, the determination of the jackpot promotion effect pattern, and the determination of whether or not the promotion is successful are determined on the side of the effect control board 80. A variation pattern indicating that the jackpot promotion effect is executed and a variation pattern indicating that the jackpot promotion effect is not executed are prepared, and the variation pattern indicating that the jackpot promotion effect is executed is transmitted from the main board 31. Only in this case, the presence / absence of execution of the jackpot promotion effect, the determination of the jackpot promotion effect pattern, and the determination of whether or not the promotion is successful may be performed on the side of the effect control board 80. In addition, a variation pattern corresponding to whether or not a jackpot promotion effect is executed, a jackpot promotion effect pattern, and whether or not the promotion is successful is prepared, and these determinations are performed when determining the variation pattern on the main board 31 side. It may be. In this case, in the case of the high base state, the ratio determined for the variation pattern (or variation pattern type) for executing the jackpot promotion effect may be lowered or may not be determined.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 21B to 21D, the count value of the big hit continuation counter (the number of continuations for 15 round big hits in the high base state) is “0” to “2”. Depending on whether it is “3” to “6”, or “7” or more, the execution ratio of the jackpot promotion effect, the determination ratio of the jackpot promotion pattern, the rate of successful promotion differed , Corresponding to the number of continuations of 15 rounds of big hits in the high base state, it is sufficient if the execution rate of the jackpot promotion promotion, the decision rate of the jackpot promotion promotion pattern, and the rate of successful promotion are different, classify more finely than this The execution ratio of the jackpot promotion effect, the determination ratio of the jackpot promotion effect pattern, and the rate of successful promotion may be made different depending on whether or not the number of times is equal to or greater than a predetermined number.

  In addition, the execution ratio of the jackpot promotion promotion, the determination ratio of the jackpot promotion promotion pattern, and the success rate of promotion are all made different according to the number of continuations of 15 rounds of jackpot in the high base state. Two or more may be made different.

  The timing at which the mode transition is executed is not limited to the timing at which the decorative symbol variable display is started, but after the decorative symbol variable display is started until the final stop symbol that is the variable display result is stopped. It may be executed within a predetermined period. Or after the last stop symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be executed within a predetermined period until the next variable display is started.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the circuit on which the circuit for controlling the effect device such as the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the decoration LED 25 and the frame LED 28 and the movable member 78 are mounted. It has been described that the lamp driver substrate 35 is provided. On the other hand, a circuit for controlling the effect device may be mounted on one substrate. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers, movable members, etc.) are mounted. Alternatively, two substrates, the second effect control substrate, may be provided.

  In the configuration shown in FIG. 5, the effect control CPU 101 of the effect control microcomputer 100 in the above embodiment is executed by the microcomputer mounted on the audio output board 70 and the microcomputer mounted on the lamp driver board 35. Any part of the processing may be executed. Thus, when a plurality of control boards are provided to control the production operation, the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the production display device 9 and the control content of the audio output operation in the speaker 27 are determined. The process for determining the control content of various effects operations, such as the process for determining and the process for determining the control content of the lighting operation in the light emitter such as the decoration LED 25 and the frame LED 28, is executed on any control board. Any combination may be used.

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b has been described, but the present invention is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine provided with one special symbol display. Can be applied.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 11, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the determination value is not assigned to the jackpot type of “2R probability variation”, so the second start condition In the case where the variable display result is controlled as a “big hit” based on the establishment of the big hit game state, the big hit type is set to “2R probability change” and it is assumed that the normal state does not occur after the end of the two round big hit state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the variable display result is set to “big hit” based on the establishment of the second start condition and is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the big hit type is set to “2R probability change” at a fixed determination rate. It may be possible to make a decision. In this case, in the jackpot type determination table 131, even when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the determination value may be assigned to the jackpot type of “2R probability variation”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value. Thereby, the table data in the jackpot type determination table 131 can be simplified, and the data capacity stored in the ROM 54 can be reduced. It should be noted that when the second start condition is satisfied, it may be determined that the big hit type of “2R probability variation” is at a lower determination ratio than when the first start condition is satisfied. As a result, when the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening 14 in a predetermined special gaming state such as a probability variation state or a short time state, the big hit type is determined to be “2R probability variation (probability)” and Can reduce the possibility of a two-round big hit state where almost no can be obtained, and can suppress the decline of the game entertainment.

  The determination as to whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect or the jackpot promotion effect may be performed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. In this case, for example, as the jackpot type, a plurality of types of jackpot types corresponding to the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect and the presence / absence of promotion effect during the jackpot are provided, and the jackpot type is determined by determining the jackpot type in step S244 shown in FIG. The presence / absence of a lottery effect or a jackpot promotion effect may be determined. Alternatively, as the variation pattern type and variation pattern, those corresponding to the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect and the presence / absence of promotion effect during the big hit are provided, and the variation pattern type is determined in step S270 shown in FIG. 39, or in step S272. By determining the variation pattern, the presence / absence of a re-lottery effect or a jackpot promotion effect may be determined.

  In the above embodiment, the small hit game state is controlled based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, and the game state is not changed after the small hit game state ends. However, “small hit” may not be provided as a variable display result. Note that “2R uncertain change” that is controlled to the normal state after the end of the two round big hit state may be provided as the big hit type. Further, instead of “small hit”, such “2R uncertain change” may be provided.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in advance a computer It is possible to adopt a form distributed by pre-installing in a storage device such as a device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 8a ... 1st special symbol display device 8b ... 2nd special symbol display device 9 ... Production display device 10 ... Normal symbol display device 13 ... 1st start prize opening 14 ... 2nd start prize port 15 ... Normally variable Winning ball device 20 ... Special variable winning ball device 25 ... Decoration LED
27 ... Speaker 28 ... Frame LED
31 ... Main board (game control board)
35 ... Lamp driver board 38 ... Operation unit 38a ... Operation detection switch 56 ... CPU
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 70 ... Voice output board 77 ... Relay board 78 ... Movable member 80 ... Production control board 100 ... Production control microcomputer 101 ... Production control CPU
109… VDP
560 ... Game control microcomputer

Claims (1)

When variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable and deriving and displaying a display result is provided, and when the display result of the identification information of the variable display means is a predetermined specific display result In addition, it is possible to control to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, and to control the gaming state to a normal probability state or a high probability state in which the probability of being the specific display result is higher than the normal probability state after the specific gaming state ends. A game machine
Whether or not to control to the specific gaming state, and whether to control to the normal probability state or the high probability state when controlling to the specific gaming state, the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed A pre-determination means to be determined before
In the specific gaming state controlled based on the determination by the pre-determining means, notification effect executing means for executing a notification effect for notifying whether or not the high probability state is controlled after the specific gaming state ends;
When it is determined that the high-probability state is controlled by the pre-determining unit, when the notification effect is executed by the notification effect executing unit, a first ratio is determined, and When it is determined to be controlled to the normal probability state, when the notification effect is executed by the notification effect execution unit, a notification effect determination unit that determines at a second rate;
Common execution of a common effect regardless of whether the state is the high probability state or the normal probability state when it is not notified that the specific gaming state is controlled to the high probability state by the end of the specific gaming state Production execution means,
The notification effect executing means notifies that it is controlled to the high probability state on the condition that the prior determination means is determined to be controlled to the high probability state,
The notification effect determining means determines whether or not to execute the notification effect by making the first ratio and the second ratio different based on the number of times the specific game state is controlled during a predetermined period. A gaming machine characterized by that.